OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc_me/openrisc_me/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc_me

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-src/] [gdb-6.8/] [gdb/] [doc/] [gdbint.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 450

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 24 jeremybenn
\input texinfo   @c -*- texinfo -*-
2
@setfilename gdbint.info
3
@include gdb-cfg.texi
4
@dircategory Software development
5
@direntry
6
* Gdb-Internals: (gdbint).      The GNU debugger's internals.
7
@end direntry
8
 
9 131 jeremybenn
@copying
10
Copyright @copyright{} 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999,
11
2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009
12
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
13 24 jeremybenn
Contributed by Cygnus Solutions.  Written by John Gilmore.
14
Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
15
 
16
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
17
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
18
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
19
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
20
Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
21
Free Documentation License''.
22 131 jeremybenn
@end copying
23 24 jeremybenn
 
24 131 jeremybenn
@ifnottex
25
This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
26
 
27
@insertcopying
28
@end ifnottex
29
 
30 24 jeremybenn
@setchapternewpage off
31
@settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
32
 
33
@syncodeindex fn cp
34
@syncodeindex vr cp
35
 
36
@titlepage
37
@title @value{GDBN} Internals
38
@subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
39
@author John Gilmore
40
@author Cygnus Solutions
41
@author Second Edition:
42
@author Stan Shebs
43
@author Cygnus Solutions
44
@page
45
@tex
46
\def\$#1${{#1}}  % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
47
\xdef\manvers{\$Revision$}  % For use in headers, footers too
48
{\parskip=0pt
49
\hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
50
\hfill \manvers\par
51
\hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
52
}
53
@end tex
54
 
55
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
56 131 jeremybenn
@insertcopying
57 24 jeremybenn
@end titlepage
58
 
59
@contents
60
 
61
@node Top
62
@c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
63
@c not for TeX).  Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
64
@top Scope of this Document
65
 
66
This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}.  It
67
includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
68
as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
69
 
70
@menu
71 131 jeremybenn
* Summary::
72 24 jeremybenn
* Overall Structure::
73
* Algorithms::
74
* User Interface::
75
* libgdb::
76 131 jeremybenn
* Values::
77
* Stack Frames::
78 24 jeremybenn
* Symbol Handling::
79
* Language Support::
80
* Host Definition::
81
* Target Architecture Definition::
82
* Target Descriptions::
83
* Target Vector Definition::
84
* Native Debugging::
85
* Support Libraries::
86
* Coding::
87
* Porting GDB::
88
* Versions and Branches::
89
* Start of New Year Procedure::
90
* Releasing GDB::
91
* Testsuite::
92
* Hints::
93
 
94
* GDB Observers::  @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
95
* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license for this documentation
96
* Index::
97
@end menu
98
 
99 131 jeremybenn
@node Summary
100
@chapter Summary
101
 
102
@menu
103
* Requirements::
104
* Contributors::
105
@end menu
106
 
107 24 jeremybenn
@node Requirements
108 131 jeremybenn
@section Requirements
109 24 jeremybenn
@cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
110
 
111
Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
112
requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}.  Although some
113
of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
114
that have run counter to these requirements.
115
 
116
First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger.  It's not designed to be a
117
front panel for embedded systems.  It's not a text editor.  It's not a
118
shell.  It's not a programming environment.
119
 
120
@value{GDBN} is an interactive tool.  Although a batch mode is
121
available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
122
programmer.
123
 
124
@value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user.  A programmer hot on
125
the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
126
going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
127
to debugger commands.
128
 
129
@value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
130
While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
131
picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
132
programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
133
mollify the debugger.
134
 
135
@value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
136
Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
137
heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
138
 
139
@value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere.  No other debugger is
140
available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
141
supports.
142
 
143 131 jeremybenn
@node Contributors
144
@section Contributors
145 24 jeremybenn
 
146 131 jeremybenn
The first edition of this document was written by John Gilmore of
147
Cygnus Solutions.  The current second edition was written by Stan Shebs
148
of Cygnus Solutions, who continues to update the manual.
149
 
150
Over the years, many others have made additions and changes to this
151
document.  This section attempts to record the significant contributors
152
to that effort.  One of the virtues of free software is that everyone
153
is free to contribute to it; with regret, we cannot actually
154
acknowledge everyone here.
155
 
156
@quotation
157
@emph{Plea:} This section has only been added relatively recently (four
158
years after publication of the second edition).  Additions to this
159
section are particularly welcome.  If you or your friends (or enemies,
160
to be evenhanded) have been unfairly omitted from this list, we would
161
like to add your names!
162
@end quotation
163
 
164
A document such as this relies on being kept up to date by numerous
165
small updates by contributing engineers as they make changes to the
166
code base.  The file @file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution
167
approximates a blow-by-blow account.  The most prolific contributors to
168
this important, but low profile task are Andrew Cagney (responsible
169
for over half the entries), Daniel Jacobowitz, Mark Kettenis, Jim
170
Blandy and Eli Zaretskii.
171
 
172
Eli Zaretskii and Daniel Jacobowitz wrote the sections documenting
173
watchpoints.
174
 
175
Jeremy Bennett updated the sections on initializing a new architecture
176
and register representation, and added the section on Frame Interpretation.
177
 
178
 
179 24 jeremybenn
@node Overall Structure
180
 
181
@chapter Overall Structure
182
 
183
@value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
184
symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
185
@dfn{target side}).
186
 
187
The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
188
supporting code.
189
 
190
The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
191
interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
192
parsing, type and value printing.
193
 
194
The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
195
physical target manipulation.
196
 
197
The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
198
number of exceptions.  For instance, core file support involves symbolic
199
elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
200
supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers).  Instead,
201
this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
202
should fit together.
203
 
204
@section The Symbol Side
205
 
206
The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
207
you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
208
For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
209
many kinds of expressions.
210
 
211
@section The Target Side
212
 
213
The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
214
Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
215
of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
216
available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
217
 
218
Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
219
display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all.  In some cases,
220
such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
221
relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
222
way.
223
 
224
@section Configurations
225
 
226
@cindex host
227
@cindex target
228
@dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
229
@dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
230
executes.  In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
231
third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
232
 
233 131 jeremybenn
Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host
234
support.  Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte
235
order, host float format.  These are all calculated by @code{autoconf}
236
when the debugger is built.
237 24 jeremybenn
 
238
Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
239
dependent.  Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
240
breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
241
to call a function.
242
 
243
Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
244
is native dependent.  One example is Unix child process support; if the
245 131 jeremybenn
host and target are not the same, calling @code{fork} to start the target
246 24 jeremybenn
process is a bad idea.  The various macros needed for finding the
247
registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
248
in the native-dependent files.
249
 
250
Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
251
are really part of the target environment, but which require
252
@code{#include} files that are only available on the host system.  Core
253
file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
254
 
255 131 jeremybenn
When you want to make @value{GDBN} work as the traditional native debugger
256
on a system, you will need to supply both target and native information.
257 24 jeremybenn
 
258
@section Source Tree Structure
259
@cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
260
 
261
The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
262
are only a few subdirectories.  A file's name usually gives a hint as
263
to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
264
@file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
265
 
266
Files that are related to some common task have names that share
267
common substrings.  For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
268
debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
269
reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
270
deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
271
parlance for the program being debugged).
272
 
273
There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
274
@samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
275
files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
276
(sparc, mips, etc).  Usually, only one of these will be used in a
277
specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
278
 
279
Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
280
debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
281
native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
282
 
283
The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
284
 
285
@table @file
286
@item cli
287
Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
288
Interpreter.  @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
289
 
290
@item gdbserver
291
Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
292
 
293
@item gdbtk
294
Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
295
 
296
@item mi
297
The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
298
 
299
@item signals
300
Target signal translation code.
301
 
302
@item tui
303
Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
304
Interface.  @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
305
@end table
306
 
307
@node Algorithms
308
 
309
@chapter Algorithms
310
@cindex algorithms
311
 
312
@value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms.  They are
313
often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
314
cases and real-world issues.  This chapter describes the basic
315
algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
316
they use.
317
 
318
@section Prologue Analysis
319
 
320
@cindex prologue analysis
321
@cindex call frame information
322
@cindex CFI (call frame information)
323
To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
324
variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
325
of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
326
saved.  Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
327
younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
328
scattered unpredictably across younger frames.  This means that
329
changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
330
may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
331
 
332
Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
333
which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
334
But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
335
technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
336
registers.  A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
337
code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
338
allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
339
register, save registers, and so on.  Obviously, this can't be done
340
accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
341
helpful.  Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
342
CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
343
@value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
344
calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
345
 
346
In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
347
target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
348
optimizers.  Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
349
write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
350
understand all the prologues GCC would generate.  However, over time
351
GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
352
understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
353
themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
354
and fragile.  Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
355
instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
356
 
357
@cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
358
@cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
359
@cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
360
To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
361
and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
362
prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
363
analyzers.  When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
364
framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
365
``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
366
using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
367
would hold when the code actually runs.  For example, if our function
368
starts with the instruction:
369
 
370
@example
371
addi r1, 42     # add 42 to r1
372
@end example
373
@noindent
374
we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
375
this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
376
value.
377
 
378
If we then see an instruction like:
379
 
380
@example
381
addi r1, 22     # add 22 to r1
382
@end example
383
@noindent
384
we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
385
it is now 64 greater than its original value.
386
 
387
If the next instruction were:
388
 
389
@example
390
mov r2, r1      # set r2 to r1's value
391
@end example
392
@noindent
393
then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
394
@code{r1} plus 64.
395
 
396
It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
397
need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
398
registers.  So after an instruction like this:
399
 
400
@example
401
mov (fp+4), r2
402
@end example
403
@noindent
404
then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
405
holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
406
 
407
And so on.
408
 
409
Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable.  If we
410
wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
411
the instruction:
412
 
413
@example
414
xor r1, r3      # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
415
@end example
416
@noindent
417
then things would get pretty complex.  But remember, we're just doing
418
a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
419
relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
420
``unknown''.  We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
421
information is acceptable for our application.
422
 
423
So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
424
approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
425
never inaccurate.
426
 
427
Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
428
machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
429
contents of registers and memory instead of actual values.  Starting
430
from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
431
current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
432
Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
433
kept track of.
434
 
435
@itemize @bullet
436
 
437
@item
438
To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
439
stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
440
minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
441
If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
442
the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
443
we don't know the frame size.
444
 
445
@item
446
To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
447
search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
448
registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
449
original value.  If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
450
to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
451
anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
452
@end itemize
453
 
454
This does take some work.  But prologue analyzers aren't
455
quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
456
forms any more; they're big, hairy functions.  Along with inferior
457
function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
458
of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port.  So it's
459
worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
460
and maintain.  In the approach described above:
461
 
462
@itemize @bullet
463
 
464
@item
465
It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
466
whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
467
the effect of each instruction.
468
 
469
@item
470
It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
471
instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
472
wasn't already broken before.
473
 
474
@item
475
It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
476
complicate the code for each instruction.  As long as your domain
477
of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
478
what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
479
already gathering the right data for you.
480
 
481
@end itemize
482
 
483
The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
484
the framework and how to use it.
485
 
486
 
487
@section Breakpoint Handling
488
 
489
@cindex breakpoints
490
In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
491
where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
492
that location.
493
 
494
There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
495
breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
496
 
497
@cindex hardware breakpoints
498
@cindex program counter
499
Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
500
features with some chips.  Typically these work by having dedicated
501
register into which the breakpoint address may be stored.  If the PC
502
(shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
503
ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
504
exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
505
 
506
Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
507
include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
508
processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
509
address.
510
 
511
A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
512
breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
513
software breakpoints.  So although these are not literally ``hardware
514
breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
515
@value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
516
for something to happen.
517
 
518
Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
519
limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
520
start trying to set software breakpoints.  (On some architectures,
521
notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
522
whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
523
breakpoints and watchpoints.  On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
524
an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
525
 
526
@cindex software breakpoints
527
Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
528
The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
529
instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
530
that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
531
@value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program.  When the
532
user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
533
instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
534
 
535
Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
536
must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM.  It
537
can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
538
although such a situation would be highly unusual.
539
 
540
Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
541
instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
542
target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
543
breakpoint instruction.  (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
544
larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
545
targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
546
instructions may jumped to.)  Note that it's possible for an instruction
547
set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
548
although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
549
instruction.
550
 
551
Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}.  However,
552
much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
553
 
554
@table @code
555
@cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
556
@findex target_remove_breakpoint
557
@findex target_insert_breakpoint
558
@item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
559
@itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
560
Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
561
@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
562
non-zero for failure.  On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
563
breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero.  The fields of the
564
@code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
565
to contain other information about the breakpoint on output.  The field
566
@code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
567
related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
568
contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
569
if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
570
underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
571
memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
572
@code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
573
it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
574
 
575
For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
576
shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero.  However,
577
the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
578
@code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
579
used to remove the breakpoint.
580
 
581
@cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
582
@findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
583
@findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
584
@item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
585
@itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
586
Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
587
@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
588
non-zero for failure.  See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
589
a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
590
@var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
591
@code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
592
but @code{placed_size} may be.
593
@end table
594
 
595
@section Single Stepping
596
 
597
@section Signal Handling
598
 
599
@section Thread Handling
600
 
601
@section Inferior Function Calls
602
 
603
@section Longjmp Support
604
 
605
@cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
606
@value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
607
@code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
608
stepping.  This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
609
which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
610
command.
611
 
612
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
613
To make this work, you need to define a function called
614 131 jeremybenn
@code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the
615
@code{jmp_buf} structure and extract the @code{longjmp} target address.
616
Since @code{jmp_buf} is target specific and typically defined in a
617
target header not available to @value{GDBN}, you will need to
618
determine the offset of the PC manually and return that; many targets
619
define a @code{jb_pc_offset} field in the tdep structure to save the
620
value once calculated.
621 24 jeremybenn
 
622
@section Watchpoints
623
@cindex watchpoints
624
 
625
Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
626
breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
627
instruction is executed.  When you have data which changes without
628
your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
629
hunt down and kill such bugs.
630
 
631
@cindex hardware watchpoints
632
@cindex software watchpoints
633
Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
634
known as ``software watchpoints.''  @value{GDBN} always uses
635
hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
636
software watchpoints otherwise.  Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
637
will use software watchpoints are:
638
 
639
@itemize @bullet
640
@item
641
The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
642
watchpoint support.  For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
643
to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
644
more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
645
watchpoints.
646
 
647
@item
648
The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
649
registers (as opposed to memory).
650
 
651
@item
652
Too many different watchpoints requested.  (On some architectures,
653
this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
654
resumed.)  Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
655
breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
656
breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
657
 
658
@item
659
No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
660
implementation.
661
@end itemize
662
 
663
Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
664
single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
665
watched expression(s) after each instruction.  The rest of this
666
section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
667
 
668
When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
669
possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
670
It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
671
was hit.  If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
672
 
673
Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
674
once.  This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
675
triggered, if the target can determine it.  If the triggered address
676
is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
677
method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
678
For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
679
every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
680
For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
681
@emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
682
and access watchpoints will never be considered hit.  For data-write
683
watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
684
considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
685
otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints.  For
686
each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
687
the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
688
watched value has changed.  Watchpoints whose watched values have
689
changed are announced as hit.
690
 
691 131 jeremybenn
@c FIXME move these to the main lists of target/native defns
692
 
693 24 jeremybenn
@value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
694
watchpoints:
695
 
696
@table @code
697
@findex TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
698
@item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
699
If defined, the target supports hardware watchpoints.
700 131 jeremybenn
(Currently only used for several native configs.)
701 24 jeremybenn
 
702
@findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
703
@item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
704
Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
705
possible to be set.  The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
706
of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
707
not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
708
number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set.  @var{other}
709
is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
710
are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
711
the same time).
712
 
713
@findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
714
@item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
715
Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
716
whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
717
 
718
@cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
719
@findex target_insert_watchpoint
720
@findex target_remove_watchpoint
721
@item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
722
@itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
723
Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
724
@var{len} bytes.  @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
725
possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
726
defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
727
 
728
@smallexample
729
 enum target_hw_bp_type
730
   @{
731
     hw_write   = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
732
     hw_read    = 1, /* Read    HW watchpoint */
733
     hw_access  = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
734
     hw_execute = 3  /* Execute HW breakpoint */
735
   @};
736
@end smallexample
737
 
738
@noindent
739
These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
740
 
741
@findex target_stopped_data_address
742
@item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
743
If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
744
associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
745
@var{addr_p} and return non-zero.  Otherwise, return zero.  This
746
is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints.  It is
747
not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
748
it to improve handling of those also.
749
 
750
@value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
751
immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}.  If the
752
target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
753
resuming, this method should clear it.  For instance, the x86 debug
754
control register has sticky triggered flags.
755
 
756 131 jeremybenn
@findex target_watchpoint_addr_within_range
757
@item target_watchpoint_addr_within_range (@var{target}, @var{addr}, @var{start}, @var{length})
758
Check whether @var{addr} (as returned by @code{target_stopped_data_address})
759
lies within the hardware-defined watchpoint region described by
760
@var{start} and @var{length}.  This only needs to be provided if the
761
granularity of a watchpoint is greater than one byte, i.e., if the
762
watchpoint can also trigger on nearby addresses outside of the watched
763
region.
764
 
765 24 jeremybenn
@findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
766
@item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
767
If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
768 131 jeremybenn
watchpoint to step over it.  Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
769 24 jeremybenn
this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
770
which will perform an interesting read or write.  It should be
771
set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
772
to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
773
watchpoint exception again.
774
 
775
@findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
776
@item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
777
If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
778
watchpoint to step the inferior over it.  This is usually set when
779
watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
780
interesting read or write.
781
 
782
@findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
783
@item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
784
If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
785
inferior after a watchpoint has been hit.  This is usually set
786
when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
787
read or write.
788
 
789
@findex CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
790
@item CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
791
If this is defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} will remove all
792
watchpoints before stepping the inferior.
793
 
794
@findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
795
@item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
796
Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint.  @var{wait_status} is of
797
the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
798
Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
799
the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
800
type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
801
target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
802
the @var{wait_status} argument.
803
 
804
@value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
805
@code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
806
determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
807
it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
808
@end table
809
 
810
@subsection Watchpoints and Threads
811
@cindex watchpoints, with threads
812
 
813
@value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
814
in all threads.  @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
815
act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
816
watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread.  Therefore, even
817
if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
818
watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
819
per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value.  On
820
@sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
821
@code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
822
@code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
823
@code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
824
threads.
825
 
826
@value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
827
at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
828
multi-threaded programs.  When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
829
queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
830
is resumed.  This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
831
@code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
832
thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}.  If
833
two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
834
will be called a second time for the second thread.
835
 
836
@subsection x86 Watchpoints
837
@cindex x86 debug registers
838
@cindex watchpoints, on x86
839
 
840
The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
841
registers designed to facilitate debugging.  @value{GDBN} provides a
842
generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
843
support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints.  This
844
subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
845
 
846 131 jeremybenn
(At present, the library functions read and write debug registers directly, and are
847
thus only available for native configurations.)
848
 
849 24 jeremybenn
To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
850
following:
851
 
852
@itemize @bullet
853
@findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
854
@item
855
Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
856
target-dependent headers.
857
 
858
@item
859
Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
860
defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
861
 
862
@item
863
Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
864 131 jeremybenn
@code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}).
865 24 jeremybenn
 
866
@item
867
Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
868
below.  Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
869
which does the real work.
870
@end itemize
871
 
872
The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
873
debug registers.  Values are copied between the mirror images and the
874
real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
875
provide:
876
 
877
@table @code
878
@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
879
@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
880
Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
881
 
882
@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
883
@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
884
Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
885
 
886
@findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
887
@item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
888
Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
889
number @var{idx}.
890
 
891
@findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
892
@item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
893
Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register.  This value is
894
used immediately after it is returned by
895
@code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
896
register values.
897
@end table
898
 
899
For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
900
that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
901
to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints.  This
902
allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
903
expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
904
wasting debug registers which are in short supply.  @value{GDBN}
905
maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
906
anything to use this feature.
907
 
908
The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
909
bytes long.  The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
910
be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
911
region on 4-byte boundary.  However, the x86 watchpoint support in
912
@value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
913
bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
914
a single region.  This allocation of several registers per a watched
915
region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
916
 
917
The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
918
@value{GDBN}'s application code:
919
 
920
@table @code
921
@findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
922
@item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
923
The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
924
this function.  It counts the number of debug registers required to
925
watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
926
less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
927
processors.
928
 
929
@findex i386_stopped_data_address
930
@item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
931
The target function
932
@code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
933
This
934
function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
935
Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
936
macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
937
set in DR6.
938
 
939
@findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
940
@item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
941
The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
942
is set to call this function.  The
943
argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored.  This
944
function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
945
Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
946
macro, and returns true if any bit is set.  Otherwise, false is
947
returned.
948
 
949
@findex i386_insert_watchpoint
950
@findex i386_remove_watchpoint
951
@item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
952
@itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
953
Insert or remove a watchpoint.  The macros
954
@code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
955
are set to call these functions.  @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
956
looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
957
region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
958
reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
959
register sharing between watchpoints.  If no such register is found,
960
the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
961
value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
962
register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
963
and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
964
inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
965
@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If more than one debug register is
966
required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
967
each debug register.
968
 
969
@code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
970
in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
971
length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
972
values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
973
@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If a register is shared by several
974
watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
975
decrements the reference count, and only calls
976
@code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
977
the count goes to zero.
978
 
979
@findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
980
@findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
981
@item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
982
@itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
983
These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints.  The
984
macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
985
@code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
986
The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
987
the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
988
These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
989
@code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
990
the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
991
hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
992
register.
993
 
994
@findex i386_stopped_by_hwbp
995
@item i386_stopped_by_hwbp (void)
996
This function returns non-zero if the inferior has some watchpoint or
997
hardware breakpoint that triggered.  It works like
998
@code{i386_stopped_data_address}, except that it doesn't record the
999
address whose watchpoint triggered.
1000
 
1001
@findex i386_cleanup_dregs
1002
@item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
1003
This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
1004
bits in the mirror images of the debug registers.  It doesn't affect
1005
the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
1006
@end table
1007
 
1008
@noindent
1009
@strong{Notes:}
1010
@enumerate 1
1011
@item
1012
x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
1013
However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
1014
@code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
1015
watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
1016
on x86.
1017
 
1018
@item
1019
x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
1020
only, or globally, for all the tasks.  For each debug register,
1021
there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1022
whether the associated address is watched locally or globally.  The
1023
current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1024
always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1025
watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1026
unavailable in many platforms.
1027
@end enumerate
1028
 
1029
@section Checkpoints
1030
@cindex checkpoints
1031
@cindex restart
1032
In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1033
the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1034
 
1035
Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1036
whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1037
state at a later time.  This can be expected to include the state of
1038
registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1039
of open files and devices.
1040
 
1041
There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1042
in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1043
method implemented on the target side.
1044
 
1045
A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1046
state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1047
not typically include information about external entities such as
1048
open files.  Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1049
 
1050
A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1051
as well as some subset of external (kernel) state.  This method
1052
is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1053
be used on other systems.
1054
 
1055
Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1056
method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1057
advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1058
details of how it is done.
1059
 
1060
 
1061
@section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1062
@cindex observer pattern interface
1063
@cindex notifications about changes in internals
1064
 
1065
In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1066
some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals.  Traditionally, these
1067
modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1068
hooks and gdb-events.  Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1069
versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1070
@value{GDBN}.  The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1071
a strong limitation.
1072
 
1073
A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1074
Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented.  The goal was to provide
1075
a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1076
previously available.  This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1077
easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1078
interface when adding new notifications.
1079
 
1080
See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1081 131 jeremybenn
currently implemented in GDB.  The rationale for the current
1082 24 jeremybenn
implementation is also briefly discussed.
1083
 
1084
@node User Interface
1085
 
1086
@chapter User Interface
1087
 
1088 131 jeremybenn
@value{GDBN} has several user interfaces, of which the traditional
1089
command-line interface is perhaps the most familiar.
1090 24 jeremybenn
 
1091
@section Command Interpreter
1092
 
1093
@cindex command interpreter
1094
@cindex CLI
1095
The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple.  It is designed to
1096
allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1097
has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1098
a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1099
 
1100
For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1101
@code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1102
to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1103
 
1104
@findex add_cmd
1105
@findex add_com
1106
To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}.  @code{add_com} adds to
1107
the main command list, and should be used for those commands.  The usual
1108
place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1109
the ends of most source files.
1110
 
1111
@findex add_setshow_cmd
1112
@findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1113
To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1114
@code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}.  The former is
1115
a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1116
further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1117
the new command structures for manipulation.
1118
 
1119
@cindex deprecating commands
1120
@findex deprecate_cmd
1121
Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1122
deprecate them for some time.  Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1123
aliases to set the deprecated flag.  @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1124
@code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument.  You can use the
1125
return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1126
command immediately after it is created.
1127
 
1128
The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1129 131 jeremybenn
replacement (if one exists).  Note that the replacement string passed to
1130 24 jeremybenn
@code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1131
entire string the user should type at the command line.
1132
 
1133 131 jeremybenn
@anchor{UI-Independent Output}
1134 24 jeremybenn
@section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1135
@c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1136
@c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1137
 
1138
@cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1139
The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1140
@value{GDBN} output code.  They hide the specifics of different user
1141
interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1142
from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1143
every UI, to produce output.
1144
 
1145
@subsection Overview and Terminology
1146
 
1147
In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1148
of output, and can even generate an input request.
1149
 
1150
Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1151
 
1152
@itemize @bullet
1153
@item
1154
to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1155
 
1156
@item
1157
to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1158
operation;
1159
 
1160
@item
1161
to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1162
progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1163
 
1164
@item
1165
to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1166
 
1167
@item
1168
to show @emph{debug data};
1169
 
1170
@item
1171
to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1172
@end itemize
1173
 
1174
@noindent
1175
This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1176
although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1177
 
1178
Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1179
involves one or more of the following:
1180
 
1181
@itemize @bullet
1182
@item
1183
output of the actual data
1184
 
1185
@item
1186
formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1187
easily readable by humans
1188
 
1189
@item
1190
machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1191
parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1192
 
1193
@item
1194
annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1195
parts in the output
1196
@end itemize
1197
 
1198
The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1199
Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines.  Note that use
1200
of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1201
deprecated.
1202
 
1203
Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1204
a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1205
non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1206
header and a body.  In a BNF-like form:
1207
 
1208
@table @code
1209
@item <table> @expansion{}
1210
@code{<header> <body>}
1211
@item <header> @expansion{}
1212
@code{@{ <column> @}}
1213
@item <column> @expansion{}
1214
@code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1215
@item <body> @expansion{}
1216
@code{@{<row>@}}
1217
@end table
1218
 
1219
 
1220
@subsection General Conventions
1221
 
1222
Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1223
@code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1224
object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1225
 
1226
The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1227
to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1228
 
1229
The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1230
When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1231
sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1232
format.
1233
 
1234
When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1235
call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1236
 
1237
 
1238
@subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1239
 
1240
@cindex list output functions
1241
@cindex table output functions
1242
@cindex tuple output functions
1243
This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1244
tuples and tables.  The routines to output the actual data items
1245
(fields) are presented in the next section.
1246
 
1247
To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1248
containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1249
fields where each field describes an identical object.
1250
 
1251
Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1252
rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading.  Use this
1253
even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1254
 
1255
@cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1256
Tables can not be nested.  Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1257
maximum of five levels.
1258
 
1259
The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1260
 
1261
@smallexample
1262
  ui_out_table_begin
1263
    ui_out_table_header
1264
    @dots{}
1265
    ui_out_table_body
1266
      ui_out_tuple_begin
1267
        ui_out_field_*
1268
        @dots{}
1269
      ui_out_tuple_end
1270
      @dots{}
1271
  ui_out_table_end
1272
@end smallexample
1273
 
1274
Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1275
functions:
1276
 
1277
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1278
The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1279
of a table.  It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1280
function for a given table.  @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1281 131 jeremybenn
the table.  @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1282 24 jeremybenn
@var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table.  The string
1283
pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1284
@code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1285
was @code{malloc}ed.
1286
 
1287
The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1288
the end of the table's output.
1289
@end deftypefun
1290
 
1291
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1292
@code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1293
table column.  You call this function several times, one each for every
1294
column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1295
@code{ui_out_table_body}.
1296
 
1297
The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters.  The
1298
value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1299
@code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1300
center, or right-justify it.  @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1301
specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1302
column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1303
call.
1304
@end deftypefun
1305
 
1306
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1307
This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1308
@end deftypefun
1309
 
1310
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1311
This function signals the end of a table's output.  It should be called
1312
after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1313
functions.
1314
 
1315
There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1316
call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1317
will signal an internal error.
1318
@end deftypefun
1319
 
1320
The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1321
call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1322
@code{ui_out_table_end}.  You build a tuple by calling
1323
@code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1324
calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1325
 
1326
@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1327
This function marks the beginning of a tuple output.  @var{id} points
1328
to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1329
implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1330
after the call.
1331
@end deftypefun
1332
 
1333
@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1334
This function signals an end of a tuple output.  There should be exactly
1335
one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1336
@code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1337
be signaled.
1338
@end deftypefun
1339
 
1340 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1341 24 jeremybenn
This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1342
(@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple.  It provides a convenient
1343
and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1344
cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1345
@smallexample
1346
struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1347
ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1348
old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1349
                            uiout);
1350
@end smallexample
1351
@end deftypefun
1352
 
1353
@deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1354
This function marks the beginning of a list output.  @var{id} points to
1355
an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1356
implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1357
after the call.
1358
@end deftypefun
1359
 
1360
@deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1361
This function signals an end of a list output.  There should be exactly
1362
one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1363
@code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1364
be signaled.
1365
@end deftypefun
1366
 
1367 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1368 24 jeremybenn
Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1369
opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1370
that will close the list.
1371
@end deftypefun
1372
 
1373
@subsection Item Output Functions
1374
 
1375
@cindex item output functions
1376
@cindex field output functions
1377
@cindex data output
1378
The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1379
items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1380
 
1381
Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1382
 
1383
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1384
This is the most general output function.  It produces the
1385
representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1386
according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1387
@code{printf}-like format string.  The optional argument @var{fldname}
1388
supplies the name of the field.  The data items themselves are
1389
supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1390
 
1391
This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1392
use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1393
@end deftypefun
1394
 
1395
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1396
This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It uses the
1397
@code{"%d"} output conversion specification.  @var{fldname} specifies
1398
the name of the field.
1399
@end deftypefun
1400
 
1401
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1402
This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It differs from
1403
@code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1404
@var{fldname} specifies
1405
the name of the field.
1406
@end deftypefun
1407
 
1408
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1409
This function outputs an address.
1410
@end deftypefun
1411
 
1412
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1413
This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1414
specification.
1415
@end deftypefun
1416
 
1417
Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1418
functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1419
@code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}.  These functions accept an argument of
1420
the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1421
used to store the data stream used for the output.  When you use one
1422
of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1423
@code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions.  To this end,
1424
you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1425
@code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1426
@code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1427
and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1428
constructed.  When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1429
you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1430
@code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1431
 
1432 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefun {struct ui_stream *} ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1433 24 jeremybenn
This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1434
same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1435
passed in @var{uiout}.  It returns a pointer to the newly created
1436
@code{ui_stream} object.
1437
@end deftypefun
1438
 
1439
@deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1440
This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1441
@var{streambuf}.
1442
@end deftypefun
1443
 
1444
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1445
This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1446
@code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1447
@code{ui_out_field_string} does.  After a call to
1448
@code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1449
the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1450
@end deftypefun
1451
 
1452
@strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1453
out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1454
@code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1455
cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources.  Here's a
1456
skeleton code to do that:
1457
 
1458
@smallexample
1459
 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1460
 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1461
 ...
1462
 do_cleanups (old);
1463
@end smallexample
1464
 
1465
If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1466
of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1467
 
1468
@smallexample
1469
  mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1470
  make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1471
@end smallexample
1472
 
1473
Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1474
@code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1475
same buffer twice.
1476
 
1477
@subsection Utility Output Functions
1478
 
1479
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1480
This function skips a field in a table.  Use it if you have to leave
1481
an empty field without disrupting the table alignment.  The argument
1482
@var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1483
@end deftypefun
1484
 
1485
@deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1486
This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1487
easy to be read by humans.  For example, the console implementation of
1488
this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1489
from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1490
 
1491
Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1492
the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1493
to the table's format.  Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1494
string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1495
output short messages.
1496
@end deftypefun
1497
 
1498
@deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1499
This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces.  It is handy to align the
1500
text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1501
list.
1502
@end deftypefun
1503
 
1504
@deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1505
This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1506
verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}.  The
1507
current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1508
verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1509
setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1510
as zero.  So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1511
argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1512
@end deftypefun
1513
 
1514
@deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1515
This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1516
of where to break lines which are too long.  Ignored for all other
1517
output consumers.  @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1518
be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1519
accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1520
explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions.  If
1521
@var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1522
@end deftypefun
1523
 
1524
@deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1525
This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1526
the UI buffers output.
1527
@end deftypefun
1528
 
1529
 
1530
@subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1531
 
1532
@cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1533
@cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1534
This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1535
functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1536
@value{GDBN}.  The examples all come from functions defined on the
1537
@file{breakpoints.c} file.
1538
 
1539
This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1540
produce a table.
1541
 
1542
The original code was:
1543
 
1544
@smallexample
1545
 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1546
   @{
1547
     annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1548
 
1549
     annotate_field (0);
1550
     printf_filtered ("Num ");
1551
     annotate_field (1);
1552
     printf_filtered ("Type           ");
1553
     annotate_field (2);
1554
     printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1555
     annotate_field (3);
1556
     printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1557
     if (addressprint)
1558
       @{
1559
         annotate_field (4);
1560
         printf_filtered ("Address    ");
1561
       @}
1562
     annotate_field (5);
1563
     printf_filtered ("What\n");
1564
 
1565
     annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1566
   @}
1567
@end smallexample
1568
 
1569
Here's the new version:
1570
 
1571
@smallexample
1572
  nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1573
 
1574
  if (addressprint)
1575
    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1576
  else
1577
    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1578
 
1579
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1580
    annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1581
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1582
    annotate_field (0);
1583
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num");             /* 1 */
1584
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1585
    annotate_field (1);
1586
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type");             /* 2 */
1587
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1588
    annotate_field (2);
1589
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp");              /* 3 */
1590
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1591
    annotate_field (3);
1592
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb");    /* 4 */
1593
  if (addressprint)
1594
    @{
1595
     if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1596
       annotate_field (4);
1597
     if (gdbarch_addr_bit (current_gdbarch) <= 32)
1598
       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1599
     else
1600
       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1601
    @}
1602
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1603
    annotate_field (5);
1604
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What");  /* 6 */
1605
  ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1606
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1607
    annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1608
@end smallexample
1609
 
1610
This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1611
to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1612
in the above example.  The original code was:
1613
 
1614
@smallexample
1615
   annotate_record ();
1616
   annotate_field (0);
1617
   printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1618
   annotate_field (1);
1619
   if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1620
       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1621
     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1622
                     (int)b->type);
1623
   printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1624
   annotate_field (2);
1625
   printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1626
   annotate_field (3);
1627
   printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1628
   @dots{}
1629
@end smallexample
1630
 
1631
This is the new version:
1632
 
1633
@smallexample
1634
   annotate_record ();
1635
   ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1636
   annotate_field (0);
1637
   ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1638
   annotate_field (1);
1639
   if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1640
       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1641
     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1642
                     (int) b->type);
1643
   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1644
   annotate_field (2);
1645
   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1646
   annotate_field (3);
1647
   ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1648
   @dots{}
1649
@end smallexample
1650
 
1651
This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1652
produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1653
functions which requires a stream to be passed.  It also shows how to
1654
automate stream destruction with cleanups.  The original code was:
1655
 
1656
@smallexample
1657
    annotate_field (5);
1658
    print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1659
@end smallexample
1660
 
1661
The new version is:
1662
 
1663
@smallexample
1664
  struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1665
  struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1666
  ...
1667
  annotate_field (5);
1668
  print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1669
  ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1670
@end smallexample
1671
 
1672
This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1673
@code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original code
1674
was:
1675
 
1676
@smallexample
1677
  annotate_field (5);
1678
  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1679
    printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1680
  else
1681
    printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1682
@end smallexample
1683
 
1684
It became:
1685
 
1686
@smallexample
1687
  annotate_field (5);
1688
  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1689
    @{
1690
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1691
      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1692
    @}
1693
  else
1694
    @{
1695
      ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1696
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1697
      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1698
    @}
1699
@end smallexample
1700
 
1701
The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1702
use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}.  The original
1703
code was:
1704
 
1705
@smallexample
1706
  annotate_field (5);
1707
  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1708
    printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1709
@end smallexample
1710
 
1711
It became:
1712
 
1713
@smallexample
1714
  annotate_field (5);
1715
  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1716
    @{
1717
      ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1718
      ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1719
      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1720
    @}
1721
@end smallexample
1722
 
1723
Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original
1724
code was:
1725
 
1726
@smallexample
1727
  annotate_field (5);
1728
  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1729
    printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1730
@end smallexample
1731
 
1732
It became:
1733
 
1734
@smallexample
1735
  annotate_field (5);
1736
  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1737
    @{
1738
      ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1739
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1740
      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1741
    @}
1742
@end smallexample
1743
 
1744
Finally, here's an example of printing an address.  The original code:
1745
 
1746
@smallexample
1747
  annotate_field (4);
1748
  printf_filtered ("%s ",
1749
        hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1750
@end smallexample
1751
 
1752
It became:
1753
 
1754
@smallexample
1755
  annotate_field (4);
1756
  ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1757
@end smallexample
1758
 
1759
 
1760
@section Console Printing
1761
 
1762
@section TUI
1763
 
1764
@node libgdb
1765
 
1766
@chapter libgdb
1767
 
1768
@section libgdb 1.0
1769
@cindex @code{libgdb}
1770
@code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago.  The theory was
1771
to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1772
 
1773
@section libgdb 2.0
1774
@cindex @code{libgdb}
1775
@code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1776
better able to support graphical and other environments.
1777
 
1778
Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1779
evolving.  The following components have so far been identified:
1780
 
1781
@itemize @bullet
1782
@item
1783
Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1784
@item
1785
Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1786
@item
1787
Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1788
@item
1789
Library - @file{gdb.h}
1790
@end itemize
1791
 
1792
The model that ties these components together is described below.
1793
 
1794
@section The @code{libgdb} Model
1795
 
1796
A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1797
 
1798
@itemize @bullet
1799
@item
1800
As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1801
@code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1802
state, etc).
1803
@item
1804
As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1805
obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1806
@end itemize
1807
 
1808
Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1809
the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1810
controlling @code{libgdb}.  In particular, a client must ensure that
1811 131 jeremybenn
@code{libgdb} is idle (i.e.@: no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1812 24 jeremybenn
before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1813
 
1814
@section CLI support
1815
 
1816
At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1817
@code{libgdb}.  Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1818
their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1819
requirements.
1820
 
1821
It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1822
(alternate between CLI and client query modes).  The notes below sketch
1823
out the theory:
1824
 
1825
@itemize @bullet
1826
@item
1827
The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1828
@item
1829
The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1830
versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1831
@code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1832
@item
1833
The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1834
used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1835
@end itemize
1836
 
1837
When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1838
along.  Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1839
the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1840
through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1841
At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1842
virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1843
 
1844
The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1845
@code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1846
client's custom builder).
1847
 
1848
@section @code{libgdb} components
1849
 
1850
@subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1851
@file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1852
be used to implement an observer.  At present it only allows for one
1853
observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1854
the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1855
finished the current command.
1856
 
1857
@subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1858
@file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1859
create a builder.  That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1860
when doing any queries.
1861
 
1862
@subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1863
@c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1864
@file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1865
loop.  A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1866 131 jeremybenn
implement a new event-loop that @value{GDBN} would use.
1867 24 jeremybenn
 
1868
The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant.  This is so that
1869
@value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1870
instead of returning.
1871
 
1872
@subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1873
@file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system.  It provides
1874
the query interface.  Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1875
builder.  The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1876
before the query function returns.
1877
 
1878 131 jeremybenn
@node Values
1879
@chapter Values
1880
@section Values
1881
 
1882
@cindex values
1883
@cindex @code{value} structure
1884
@value{GDBN} uses @code{struct value}, or @dfn{values}, as an internal
1885
abstraction for the representation of a variety of inferior objects
1886
and @value{GDBN} convenience objects.
1887
 
1888
Values have an associated @code{struct type}, that describes a virtual
1889
view of the raw data or object stored in or accessed through the
1890
value.
1891
 
1892
A value is in addition discriminated by its lvalue-ness, given its
1893
@code{enum lval_type} enumeration type:
1894
 
1895
@cindex @code{lval_type} enumeration, for values.
1896
@table @code
1897
@item @code{not_lval}
1898
This value is not an lval.  It can't be assigned to.
1899
 
1900
@item @code{lval_memory}
1901
This value represents an object in memory.
1902
 
1903
@item @code{lval_register}
1904
This value represents an object that lives in a register.
1905
 
1906
@item @code{lval_internalvar}
1907
Represents the value of an internal variable.
1908
 
1909
@item @code{lval_internalvar_component}
1910
Represents part of a @value{GDBN} internal variable.  E.g., a
1911
structure field.
1912
 
1913
@cindex computed values
1914
@item @code{lval_computed}
1915
These are ``computed'' values.  They allow creating specialized value
1916
objects for specific purposes, all abstracted away from the core value
1917
support code.  The creator of such a value writes specialized
1918
functions to handle the reading and writing to/from the value's
1919
backend data, and optionally, a ``copy operator'' and a
1920
``destructor''.
1921
 
1922
Pointers to these functions are stored in a @code{struct lval_funcs}
1923
instance (declared in @file{value.h}), and passed to the
1924
@code{allocate_computed_value} function, as in the example below.
1925
 
1926
@smallexample
1927
static void
1928
nil_value_read (struct value *v)
1929
@{
1930
  /* This callback reads data from some backend, and stores it in V.
1931
     In this case, we always read null data.  You'll want to fill in
1932
     something more interesting.  */
1933
 
1934
  memset (value_contents_all_raw (v),
1935
          value_offset (v),
1936
          TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (v)));
1937
@}
1938
 
1939
static void
1940
nil_value_write (struct value *v, struct value *fromval)
1941
@{
1942
  /* Takes the data from FROMVAL and stores it in the backend of V.  */
1943
 
1944
  to_oblivion (value_contents_all_raw (fromval),
1945
               value_offset (v),
1946
               TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (fromval)));
1947
@}
1948
 
1949
static struct lval_funcs nil_value_funcs =
1950
  @{
1951
    nil_value_read,
1952
    nil_value_write
1953
  @};
1954
 
1955
struct value *
1956
make_nil_value (void)
1957
@{
1958
   struct type *type;
1959
   struct value *v;
1960
 
1961
   type = make_nils_type ();
1962
   v = allocate_computed_value (type, &nil_value_funcs, NULL);
1963
 
1964
   return v;
1965
@}
1966
@end smallexample
1967
 
1968
See the implementation of the @code{$_siginfo} convenience variable in
1969
@file{infrun.c} as a real example use of lval_computed.
1970
 
1971
@end table
1972
 
1973
@node Stack Frames
1974
@chapter Stack Frames
1975
 
1976
@cindex frame
1977
@cindex call stack frame
1978
A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
1979
and called functions.
1980
 
1981
@cindex unwind frame
1982
@value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
1983
need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind.  In fact,
1984
the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
1985
Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
1986
read the @sc{dwarf} specification, available from
1987
@url{http://www.dwarfstd.org}.
1988
 
1989
@findex frame_register_unwind
1990
@findex get_frame_register
1991
@value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
1992
``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame.  That is,
1993
@samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
1994
frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
1995
#0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame).  But then the
1996
obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
1997
frame itself?
1998
 
1999
@cindex sentinel frame
2000
@findex get_frame_type
2001
@vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
2002
To answer this question, @value{GDBN} has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
2003
``-1st'' frame.  Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
2004
the current values of the youngest real frame's registers.  If @var{f}
2005
is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) @equiv{}
2006
SENTINEL_FRAME}.
2007
 
2008
@section Selecting an Unwinder
2009
 
2010
@findex frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder
2011
@findex frame_unwind_append_unwinder
2012
The architecture registers a list of frame unwinders (@code{struct
2013
frame_unwind}), using the functions
2014
@code{frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder} and
2015
@code{frame_unwind_append_unwinder}.  Each unwinder includes a
2016
sniffer.  Whenever @value{GDBN} needs to unwind a frame (to fetch the
2017
previous frame's registers or the current frame's ID), it calls
2018
registered sniffers in order to find one which recognizes the frame.
2019
The first time a sniffer returns non-zero, the corresponding unwinder
2020
is assigned to the frame.
2021
 
2022
@section Unwinding the Frame ID
2023
@cindex frame ID
2024
 
2025
Every frame has an associated ID, of type @code{struct frame_id}.
2026
The ID includes the stack base and function start address for
2027
the frame.  The ID persists through the entire life of the frame,
2028
including while other called frames are running; it is used to
2029
locate an appropriate @code{struct frame_info} from the cache.
2030
 
2031
Every time the inferior stops, and at various other times, the frame
2032
cache is flushed.  Because of this, parts of @value{GDBN} which need
2033
to keep track of individual frames cannot use pointers to @code{struct
2034
frame_info}.  A frame ID provides a stable reference to a frame, even
2035
when the unwinder must be run again to generate a new @code{struct
2036
frame_info} for the same frame.
2037
 
2038
The frame's unwinder's @code{this_id} method is called to find the ID.
2039
Note that this is different from register unwinding, where the next
2040
frame's @code{prev_register} is called to unwind this frame's
2041
registers.
2042
 
2043
Both stack base and function address are required to identify the
2044
frame, because a recursive function has the same function address for
2045
two consecutive frames and a leaf function may have the same stack
2046
address as its caller.  On some platforms, a third address is part of
2047
the ID to further disambiguate frames---for instance, on IA-64
2048
the separate register stack address is included in the ID.
2049
 
2050
An invalid frame ID (@code{null_frame_id}) returned from the
2051
@code{this_id} method means to stop unwinding after this frame.
2052
 
2053
@section Unwinding Registers
2054
 
2055
Each unwinder includes a @code{prev_register} method.  This method
2056
takes a frame, an associated cache pointer, and a register number.
2057
It returns a @code{struct value *} describing the requested register,
2058
as saved by this frame.  This is the value of the register that is
2059
current in this frame's caller.
2060
 
2061
The returned value must have the same type as the register.  It may
2062
have any lvalue type.  In most circumstances one of these routines
2063
will generate the appropriate value:
2064
 
2065
@table @code
2066
@item frame_unwind_got_optimized
2067
@findex frame_unwind_got_optimized
2068
This register was not saved.
2069
 
2070
@item frame_unwind_got_register
2071
@findex frame_unwind_got_register
2072
This register was copied into another register in this frame.  This
2073
is also used for unchanged registers; they are ``copied'' into the
2074
same register.
2075
 
2076
@item frame_unwind_got_memory
2077
@findex frame_unwind_got_memory
2078
This register was saved in memory.
2079
 
2080
@item frame_unwind_got_constant
2081
@findex frame_unwind_got_constant
2082
This register was not saved, but the unwinder can compute the previous
2083
value some other way.
2084
 
2085
@item frame_unwind_got_address
2086
@findex frame_unwind_got_address
2087
Same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}, except that the value is a target
2088
address.  This is frequently used for the stack pointer, which is not
2089
explicitly saved but has a known offset from this frame's stack
2090
pointer.  For architectures with a flat unified address space, this is
2091
generally the same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}.
2092
@end table
2093
 
2094 24 jeremybenn
@node Symbol Handling
2095
 
2096
@chapter Symbol Handling
2097
 
2098 131 jeremybenn
Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation.  Symbols include
2099
variables, functions, and types.
2100 24 jeremybenn
 
2101 131 jeremybenn
Symbol information for a large program can be truly massive, and
2102
reading of symbol information is one of the major performance
2103
bottlenecks in @value{GDBN}; it can take many minutes to process it
2104
all.  Studies have shown that nearly all the time spent is
2105
computational, rather than file reading.
2106
 
2107
One of the ways for @value{GDBN} to provide a good user experience is
2108
to start up quickly, taking no more than a few seconds.  It is simply
2109
not possible to process all of a program's debugging info in that
2110
time, and so we attempt to handle symbols incrementally.  For instance,
2111
we create @dfn{partial symbol tables} consisting of only selected
2112
symbols, and only expand them to full symbol tables when necessary.
2113
 
2114 24 jeremybenn
@section Symbol Reading
2115
 
2116
@cindex symbol reading
2117
@cindex reading of symbols
2118
@cindex symbol files
2119
@value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}.  The usual symbol
2120
file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
2121
debugging.  @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
2122
symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
2123 131 jeremybenn
more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands.  In
2124
addition, it may bring in more symbols while loading shared
2125
libraries.
2126 24 jeremybenn
 
2127
@findex find_sym_fns
2128
Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
2129
the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}).  BFD identifies the type
2130
of the file by examining its header.  @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
2131
this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
2132
 
2133
@findex add_symtab_fns
2134
@cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
2135
@cindex adding a symbol-reading module
2136
Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
2137
@code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization.  The argument
2138
to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
2139
name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
2140
and pointers to four functions.  These functions are called at various
2141
times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
2142
prefix.
2143
 
2144
The functions supplied by each module are:
2145
 
2146
@table @code
2147
@item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
2148
 
2149
@cindex secondary symbol file
2150
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
2151
symbol file.  This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
2152
resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
2153
read a new symbol file.  Note that the symbol file which we are reading
2154
might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
2155
whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
2156
 
2157
The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
2158
@code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
2159
new symbol file being read.  Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
2160
and can be modified as desired.  Typically, a struct of private
2161
information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
2162
in the @code{private} field.
2163
 
2164
There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
2165
@code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
2166
 
2167
@item @var{xyz}_new_init()
2168
 
2169
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
2170
This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
2171
state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
2172
@value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}.  It has no
2173
arguments and no result.  It may be called after
2174
@code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
2175
may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
2176
 
2177
@item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
2178
 
2179
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
2180
symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
2181
 
2182
@code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
2183
@code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization.  @code{addr} is
2184
the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
2185
address in memory.  @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
2186
table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
2187
or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
2188
@end table
2189
 
2190
In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
2191
@var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
2192
to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
2193
from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
2194
 
2195
@table @code
2196
@item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
2197
 
2198
Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
2199
the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
2200
pointer set.  The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
2201
symtab.  Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
2202
@code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
2203
zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
2204
@end table
2205
 
2206
@section Partial Symbol Tables
2207
 
2208
@value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
2209
 
2210
@itemize @bullet
2211
@cindex full symbol table
2212
@cindex symtabs
2213
@item
2214
Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}).  These contain the main
2215
information about symbols and addresses.
2216
 
2217
@cindex psymtabs
2218
@item
2219
Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}).  These contain enough
2220
information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
2221
symbol table.
2222
 
2223
@cindex minimal symbol table
2224
@cindex minsymtabs
2225
@item
2226
Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}).  These contain information
2227
gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
2228
@end itemize
2229
 
2230
@cindex partial symbol table
2231
This section describes partial symbol tables.
2232
 
2233
A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
2234
file's debugging information.  Small amounts of information are
2235
extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
2236
need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
2237
information.  The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
2238
quickly.  Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
2239
pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
2240
the user.
2241
@c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
2242
 
2243
The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
2244
visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
2245
that file.  These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
2246
types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
2247
 
2248
The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
2249
full symbol table would represent.
2250
 
2251
@cindex finding a symbol
2252
@cindex symbol lookup
2253
The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2254
code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2255
 
2256
@itemize @bullet
2257
@findex find_pc_function
2258
@findex find_pc_line
2259
@item
2260
By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2261
function in this file).  The address will be noticed to be in the
2262
range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2263
@code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2264
@code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2265
 
2266
@cindex lookup_symbol
2267
@item
2268
By its name
2269
(e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2270
function).  Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2271
psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in.  Local names will
2272
have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2273
case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2274
qualifier.  Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2275
local scope, in which case the first case applies.  @code{lookup_symbol}
2276
does most of the work here.
2277
@end itemize
2278
 
2279
The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2280
at the right moment.  Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2281
while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it.  Since
2282
psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2283
them anyway.  Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2284
either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2285
name.
2286
 
2287
It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2288
been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2289
in.  Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2290
all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2291
ranges.
2292
 
2293
The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2294
thrown away after the symtab has been read in.  The symtab should always
2295
be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2296
bug-free environment).  Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2297
and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2298
on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2299
unless you want to do a lot more work.
2300
 
2301
@section Types
2302
 
2303
@unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2304
 
2305
@cindex fundamental types
2306
These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally.  Fundamental
2307
types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2308
into one of these.  They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2309
that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2310
knows about.
2311
 
2312
@unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2313
 
2314
@cindex type codes
2315
Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2316
of these types.  The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2317
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2318
which is a pointer to another type.  Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2319
types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2320
other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2321
or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2322
 
2323
@unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2324
 
2325
These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2326
fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2327
use for various ugly historical reasons.  We eventually want to
2328
eliminate these.  Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2329
initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2330
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2331
an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type.  The difference is that the
2332
@code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2333
only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2334
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2335
some particular objfile.
2336
 
2337
@section Object File Formats
2338
@cindex object file formats
2339
 
2340
@subsection a.out
2341
 
2342
@cindex @code{a.out} format
2343
The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix.  It
2344
consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2345
which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2346
respectively.
2347
 
2348
The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2349
place for debugging information.  (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2350
@samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!)  The only debugging
2351
format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2352
symbols with distinctive attributes.
2353
 
2354
The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2355
 
2356
@subsection COFF
2357
 
2358
@cindex COFF format
2359
The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2360
COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header.  The
2361
number of sections is limited.
2362
 
2363
The COFF specification includes support for debugging.  Although this
2364 131 jeremybenn
was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited.
2365
For instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2366
included file.  GNU's COFF-using configs often use stabs-type info,
2367
encapsulated in special sections.
2368 24 jeremybenn
 
2369
The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2370
 
2371
@subsection ECOFF
2372
 
2373
@cindex ECOFF format
2374
ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2375
workstations.
2376
 
2377
The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2378
 
2379
@subsection XCOFF
2380
 
2381
@cindex XCOFF format
2382
The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2383
The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2384
symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2385
@code{.debug} section (rather than the string table).  For more
2386
information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2387
 
2388
The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2389
shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2390
refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2391
relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable.  At least
2392
using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2393
been run (or the core file has been read).
2394
 
2395
@subsection PE
2396
 
2397
@cindex PE-COFF format
2398
Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2399
executables.  PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2400
 
2401
While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2402
COFF reader.
2403
 
2404
@subsection ELF
2405
 
2406
@cindex ELF format
2407 131 jeremybenn
The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix.  ELF is
2408
similar to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it
2409
removes many of COFF's limitations.  Debugging info may be either stabs
2410
encapsulated in ELF sections, or more commonly these days, DWARF.
2411 24 jeremybenn
 
2412
The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2413
 
2414
@subsection SOM
2415
 
2416
@cindex SOM format
2417
SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2418
SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2419
 
2420
The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2421
 
2422
@section Debugging File Formats
2423
 
2424
This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2425
are independent of the object file format.
2426
 
2427
@subsection stabs
2428
 
2429
@cindex stabs debugging info
2430
@code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2431
format.  Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2432
formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2433
 
2434
While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2435
including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2436
the real work.
2437
 
2438
@subsection COFF
2439
 
2440
@cindex COFF debugging info
2441
The basic COFF definition includes debugging information.  The level
2442
of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2443
 
2444
@subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2445
 
2446
@cindex ECOFF debugging info
2447
ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2448
 
2449
The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2450
 
2451 131 jeremybenn
@c mention DWARF 1 as a formerly-supported format
2452
 
2453 24 jeremybenn
@subsection DWARF 2
2454
 
2455
@cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2456
DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2457
 
2458
The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2459
 
2460 131 jeremybenn
@subsection Compressed DWARF 2
2461
 
2462
@cindex Compressed DWARF 2 debugging info
2463
Compressed DWARF 2 is not technically a separate debugging format, but
2464
merely DWARF 2 debug information that has been compressed.  In this
2465
format, every object-file section holding DWARF 2 debugging
2466
information is compressed and prepended with a header.  (The section
2467
is also typically renamed, so a section called @code{.debug_info} in a
2468
DWARF 2 binary would be called @code{.zdebug_info} in a compressed
2469
DWARF 2 binary.)  The header is 12 bytes long:
2470
 
2471
@itemize @bullet
2472
@item
2473
4 bytes: the literal string ``ZLIB''
2474
@item
2475
8 bytes: the uncompressed size of the section, in big-endian byte
2476
order.
2477
@end itemize
2478
 
2479
The same reader is used for both compressed an normal DWARF 2 info.
2480
Section decompression is done in @code{zlib_decompress_section} in
2481
@file{dwarf2read.c}.
2482
 
2483
@subsection DWARF 3
2484
 
2485
@cindex DWARF 3 debugging info
2486
DWARF 3 is an improved version of DWARF 2.
2487
 
2488 24 jeremybenn
@subsection SOM
2489
 
2490
@cindex SOM debugging info
2491
Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2492
 
2493
@section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2494
 
2495
@cindex adding debugging info reader
2496
If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2497
there is probably little to be done.
2498
 
2499
If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2500
BFD.  This is beyond the scope of this document.
2501
 
2502
You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2503 131 jeremybenn
debugging symbols.  Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping
2504
routines from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the
2505
debugging information.  As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not
2506
depend on the BFD internal data structures.
2507 24 jeremybenn
 
2508
For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2509
to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2510
platforms have different sizes and layouts.  Specialized routines that
2511
will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2512
directly.  This interface should be described in a file
2513
@file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2514
 
2515
@section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2516
 
2517
Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2518
its @code{objfile_obstack}.  This includes symbols, types,
2519
namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2520
 
2521
Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2522
released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded.  Therefore one
2523
objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2524
they could be unloaded at different times.
2525
 
2526
User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types.  Normally
2527
these types live in the associated objfile.  However, when the objfile
2528
is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2529
the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2530
 
2531
 
2532
@node Language Support
2533
 
2534
@chapter Language Support
2535
 
2536
@cindex language support
2537
@value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2538
although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2539
manually.
2540
 
2541
@value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2542
of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2543
means Fortran, etc.  It may also use a special-purpose language
2544
identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2545
 
2546
@section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2547
 
2548
@cindex adding source language
2549
To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2550
following steps:
2551
 
2552
@table @emph
2553
@item Create the expression parser.
2554
 
2555
@cindex expression parser
2556
This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}.  Routines for
2557
building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2558
@file{parse.c}.
2559
 
2560
@cindex language parser
2561
Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2562
parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2563
@strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2564
various parsers from defining the same global names:
2565
 
2566
@smallexample
2567
#define yyparse         @var{lang}_parse
2568
#define yylex           @var{lang}_lex
2569
#define yyerror         @var{lang}_error
2570
#define yylval          @var{lang}_lval
2571
#define yychar          @var{lang}_char
2572
#define yydebug         @var{lang}_debug
2573
#define yypact          @var{lang}_pact
2574
#define yyr1            @var{lang}_r1
2575
#define yyr2            @var{lang}_r2
2576
#define yydef           @var{lang}_def
2577
#define yychk           @var{lang}_chk
2578
#define yypgo           @var{lang}_pgo
2579
#define yyact           @var{lang}_act
2580
#define yyexca          @var{lang}_exca
2581
#define yyerrflag       @var{lang}_errflag
2582
#define yynerrs         @var{lang}_nerrs
2583
@end smallexample
2584
 
2585
At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2586
initialize it with the right values for your language.  Define an
2587
@code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2588
@samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2589
that your language exists.  You'll need some other supporting variables
2590
and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2591
@code{@var{lang}_language_defn}.  See the declaration of @code{struct
2592
language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2593
for more information.
2594
 
2595
@item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2596
 
2597
@cindex expression evaluation routines
2598
@findex evaluate_subexp
2599
@findex prefixify_subexp
2600
@findex length_of_subexp
2601
If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2602
add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}.  Add support
2603
code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2604
defined in the file @file{eval.c}.  Add cases
2605
for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2606
@code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}.  These compute
2607
the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2608
 
2609
@item Update some existing code
2610
 
2611
Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2612
@code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2613
 
2614
Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2615
These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2616
are language dependent.  If your language does not appear in the switch
2617
statement, an error is reported.
2618
 
2619
@vindex current_language
2620
Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2621
@code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2622
@code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2623
string.
2624
 
2625
@findex _initialize_language
2626
Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2627
language.  This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2628
dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2629
 
2630
@findex allocate_symtab
2631
Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2632
code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2633
This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2634
Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2635
file.  If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2636
information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2637
code.
2638
 
2639
@findex print_subexp
2640
@findex op_print_tab
2641
Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2642
expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}.  Also, add the
2643
printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2644
 
2645
@item Add a place of call
2646
 
2647
@findex parse_exp_1
2648
Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2649
@code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2650
 
2651
@item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2652
 
2653
Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}.  Make sure you update the macro
2654
variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2655
not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2656
distribution!
2657
@end table
2658
 
2659
 
2660
@node Host Definition
2661
 
2662
@chapter Host Definition
2663
 
2664
With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2665
definition machinery anymore.  The following information is provided,
2666
mainly, as an historical reference.
2667
 
2668
@section Adding a New Host
2669
 
2670
@cindex adding a new host
2671
@cindex host, adding
2672
@value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2673
New host-specific definitions should not be needed.  Older hosts
2674
@value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2675
below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2676
eventually disappear.
2677
 
2678
@table @file
2679
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2680 131 jeremybenn
This file is a Makefile fragment that once contained both host and
2681
native configuration information (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the
2682
machine @var{xyz}.  The host configuration information is now handled
2683
by Autoconf.
2684 24 jeremybenn
 
2685 131 jeremybenn
Host configuration information included definitions for @code{CC},
2686 24 jeremybenn
@code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2687
@code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2688
 
2689 131 jeremybenn
New host-only configurations do not need this file.
2690 24 jeremybenn
 
2691 131 jeremybenn
@end table
2692 24 jeremybenn
 
2693 131 jeremybenn
(Files named @file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h} were once
2694
used to define host-specific macros, but were no longer needed and
2695
have all been removed.)
2696 24 jeremybenn
 
2697
@subheading Generic Host Support Files
2698
 
2699
@cindex generic host support
2700
There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2701 131 jeremybenn
various systems.
2702 24 jeremybenn
 
2703
@table @file
2704
@cindex remote debugging support
2705
@cindex serial line support
2706
@item ser-unix.c
2707 131 jeremybenn
This contains serial line support for Unix systems.  It is included by
2708
default on all Unix-like hosts.
2709 24 jeremybenn
 
2710 131 jeremybenn
@item ser-pipe.c
2711
This contains serial pipe support for Unix systems.  It is included by
2712
default on all Unix-like hosts.
2713
 
2714
@item ser-mingw.c
2715
This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under
2716
Windows using MinGW.
2717
 
2718 24 jeremybenn
@item ser-go32.c
2719
This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2720
using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2721
 
2722
@cindex TCP remote support
2723
@item ser-tcp.c
2724 131 jeremybenn
This contains generic TCP support using sockets.  It is included by
2725
default on all Unix-like hosts and with MinGW.
2726 24 jeremybenn
@end table
2727
 
2728
@section Host Conditionals
2729
 
2730
When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2731
defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2732 131 jeremybenn
attributes of the host system.  While formerly they could be set in
2733
host-specific header files, at present they can be changed only by
2734
setting @code{CFLAGS} when building, or by editing the source code.
2735 24 jeremybenn
 
2736 131 jeremybenn
These macros and their meanings (or if the meaning is not documented
2737
here, then one of the source files where they are used is indicated)
2738
are:
2739
 
2740 24 jeremybenn
@ftable @code
2741
@item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2742
The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2743
@file{.gdbinit}).
2744
 
2745
@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2746
If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2747
of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2748
 
2749
@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2750
Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2751
the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2752
 
2753
@item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2754
@cindex DOS text files
2755
Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2756
line terminator.  This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2757
characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2758
which are ``sourced'' by gdb.  It must be possible to open files in binary
2759
mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2760
 
2761
@item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2762
@cindex prompt
2763
The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2764
 
2765
@item DEV_TTY
2766
@cindex terminal device
2767
The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2768
 
2769
@item ISATTY
2770
Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2771
 
2772 131 jeremybenn
@item FOPEN_RB
2773
Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2774 24 jeremybenn
 
2775
@item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2776
@cindex @code{long long} data type
2777
Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}.  This is set
2778
by the @code{configure} script.
2779
 
2780
@item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2781
Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2782
the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}.  This is set by the
2783
@code{configure} script.
2784
 
2785
@item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2786
Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2787
@code{n} in the file.  This is only used when reading source files.  It
2788
is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2789
 
2790
@item NORETURN
2791
If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as @code{volatile},
2792
that can be used in both the declaration and definition of functions to
2793
indicate that they never return.  The default is already set correctly
2794
if compiling with GCC.  This will almost never need to be defined.
2795
 
2796
@item ATTR_NORETURN
2797
If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as
2798
@code{__attribute__ ((noreturn))}, that can be used in the declarations
2799
of functions to indicate that they never return.  The default is already
2800
set correctly if compiling with GCC.  This will almost never need to be
2801
defined.
2802
 
2803
@item lint
2804
Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2805
 
2806
@item volatile
2807
Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2808
@code{/**/}.
2809
@end ftable
2810
 
2811
 
2812
@node Target Architecture Definition
2813
 
2814
@chapter Target Architecture Definition
2815
 
2816
@cindex target architecture definition
2817
@value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2818
machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2819
with them.
2820
 
2821
The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2822
@code{struct gdbarch *}.  The structure, and its methods, are generated
2823
using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2824
 
2825
@menu
2826
* OS ABI Variant Handling::
2827
* Initialize New Architecture::
2828
* Registers and Memory::
2829
* Pointers and Addresses::
2830
* Address Classes::
2831 131 jeremybenn
* Register Representation::
2832 24 jeremybenn
* Frame Interpretation::
2833
* Inferior Call Setup::
2834 131 jeremybenn
* Defining Other Architecture Features::
2835 24 jeremybenn
* Adding a New Target::
2836
@end menu
2837
 
2838
@node  OS ABI Variant Handling
2839
@section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2840
@cindex OS ABI variants
2841
 
2842
@value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2843
ABIs.  An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2844
variables in the target architecture definition.  There are two major
2845
components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2846
 
2847
A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2848
(the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2849
OS ABI of that file.  Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2850
to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2851
considered to be @dfn{specific}.  A match from a specific sniffer
2852
overrides a match from a generic sniffer.  Multiple sniffers for an
2853
architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2854
different operating systems which use the same basic file format.  The
2855
OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2856
examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2857
sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2858
 
2859
@cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2860
A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2861
selected OS ABI.  There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2862
for each BFD architecture.
2863
 
2864
The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2865
 
2866
@table @code
2867
 
2868
@findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2869
@item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2870
Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2871
 
2872
@findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2873
@item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2874
The ABI of the inferior is unknown.  The default @code{gdbarch}
2875
settings for the architecture will be used.
2876
 
2877
@findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2878
@item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2879
UNIX System V Release 4.
2880
 
2881
@findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2882
@item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2883
GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2884
 
2885
@findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2886
@item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2887
Sun Solaris.
2888
 
2889
@findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2890
@item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2891
OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2892
 
2893
@findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2894
@item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2895
GNU using the Linux kernel.
2896
 
2897
@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2898
@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2899
FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2900
 
2901
@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2902
@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2903
FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2904
 
2905
@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2906
@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2907
NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2908
 
2909
@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2910
@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2911
NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2912
 
2913
@findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2914
@item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2915
OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2916
 
2917
@findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2918
@item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2919
Windows CE.
2920
 
2921
@findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2922
@item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2923
DJGPP.
2924
 
2925
@findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2926
@item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2927
Irix.
2928
 
2929
@findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2930
@item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2931
Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2932
 
2933
@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2934
@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2935
HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2936
 
2937
@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2938
@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2939
HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2940
 
2941
@findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2942
@item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2943
QNX Neutrino.
2944
 
2945
@findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2946
@item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2947
Cygwin.
2948
 
2949
@findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2950
@item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2951
AIX.
2952
 
2953
@end table
2954
 
2955
Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2956
 
2957 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefun {const char *} gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2958 24 jeremybenn
Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2959
@end deftypefun
2960
 
2961
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2962
Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2963
architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2964
@var{machine} and @var{osabi}.  In most cases, a value of zero for the
2965
machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2966
will suffice.
2967
@end deftypefun
2968
 
2969
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2970
Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2971
BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2972
If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2973
be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2974
any architecture.
2975
@end deftypefun
2976
 
2977 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefun {enum gdb_osabi} gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2978 24 jeremybenn
Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2979
The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2980
be determined.
2981
@end deftypefun
2982
 
2983
@deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2984
Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2985
@code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}.  If a handler
2986
corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2987
architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2988
with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2989
@end deftypefun
2990
 
2991
@deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2992
Helper routine for ELF file sniffers.  Examine the file described by
2993
@var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2994
from the note.  This function should be called via
2995
@code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2996
@end deftypefun
2997
 
2998
@node Initialize New Architecture
2999
@section Initializing a New Architecture
3000
 
3001 131 jeremybenn
@menu
3002
* How an Architecture is Represented::
3003
* Looking Up an Existing Architecture::
3004
* Creating a New Architecture::
3005
@end menu
3006
 
3007
@node How an Architecture is Represented
3008
@subsection How an Architecture is Represented
3009
@cindex architecture representation
3010
@cindex representation of architecture
3011
 
3012 24 jeremybenn
Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
3013 131 jeremybenn
via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} in the @code{bfd_architecture}
3014
enumeration.  The @code{gdbarch} is registered by a call to
3015
@code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from the file's
3016
@code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will be automatically
3017
called during @value{GDBN} startup.  The arguments are a @sc{bfd}
3018
architecture constant and an initialization function.
3019 24 jeremybenn
 
3020 131 jeremybenn
@findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
3021
@cindex @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}
3022
A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, @var{arch} is created by
3023
defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
3024
convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.  For example,
3025
in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
3026
@code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
3027
@file{or1k-tdep.c}.
3028 24 jeremybenn
 
3029 131 jeremybenn
@cindex @file{configure.tgt}
3030
@cindex @code{gdbarch}
3031
@findex gdbarch_register
3032
The resulting object files containing the implementation of the
3033
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function are specified in the @value{GDBN}
3034
@file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case statement
3035
pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
3036
@code{configure} script.  The new @code{struct gdbarch} is created
3037
within the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
3038
@code{gdbarch_register}:
3039
 
3040 24 jeremybenn
@smallexample
3041 131 jeremybenn
void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture    @var{architecture},
3042
                       gdbarch_init_ftype      *@var{init_func},
3043
                       gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *@var{tdep_dump_func});
3044
@end smallexample
3045
 
3046
The @var{architecture} will identify the unique @sc{bfd} to be
3047
associated with this @code{gdbarch}.  The @var{init_func} funciton is
3048
called to create and return the new @code{struct gdbarch}.  The
3049
@var{tdep_dump_func} function will dump the target specific details
3050
associated with this architecture.
3051
 
3052
For example the function @code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} creates its
3053
architecture for 32-bit OpenRISC 1000 architectures by calling:
3054
 
3055
@smallexample
3056
gdbarch_register (bfd_arch_or32, or1k_gdbarch_init, or1k_dump_tdep);
3057
@end smallexample
3058
 
3059
@node Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3060
@subsection Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3061
@cindex @code{gdbarch} lookup
3062
 
3063
The initialization function has this prototype:
3064
 
3065
@smallexample
3066 24 jeremybenn
static struct gdbarch *
3067
@var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
3068
                         struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
3069
@end smallexample
3070
 
3071
The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
3072
architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
3073
have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
3074
value.
3075
 
3076
The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
3077
is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not.  Then, it should
3078
search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
3079
return one if found.  Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
3080
create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
3081
 
3082 131 jeremybenn
@findex gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info
3083
@cindex @code{gdbarch_info}
3084
The lookup is done using @code{gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info}.  It is
3085
passed the list of existing architectures, @var{arches}, and the
3086
@code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info}, and returns the first matching
3087
architecture it finds, or @code{NULL} if none are found.  If an
3088
architecture is found it can be returned as the result from the
3089
initialization function, otherwise a new @code{struct gdbach} will need
3090
to be created.
3091
 
3092
The struct gdbarch_info has the following components:
3093
 
3094
@smallexample
3095
struct gdbarch_info
3096
@{
3097
   const struct bfd_arch_info *bfd_arch_info;
3098
   int                         byte_order;
3099
   bfd                        *abfd;
3100
   struct gdbarch_tdep_info   *tdep_info;
3101
   enum gdb_osabi              osabi;
3102
   const struct target_desc   *target_desc;
3103
@};
3104
@end smallexample
3105
 
3106
@vindex bfd_arch_info
3107
The @code{bfd_arch_info} member holds the key details about the
3108
architecture.  The @code{byte_order} member is a value in an
3109
enumeration indicating the endianism.  The @code{abfd} member is a
3110
pointer to the full @sc{bfd}, the @code{tdep_info} member is
3111
additional custom target specific information, @code{osabi} identifies
3112
which (if any) of a number of operating specific ABIs are used by this
3113
architecture and the @code{target_desc} member is a set of name-value
3114
pairs with information about register usage in this target.
3115
 
3116
When the @code{struct gdbarch} initialization function is called, not
3117
all the fields are provided---only those which can be deduced from the
3118
@sc{bfd}.  The @code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info} is used as a
3119
look-up key with the list of existing architectures, @var{arches} to
3120
see if a suitable architecture already exists.  The @var{tdep_info},
3121
@var{osabi} and @var{target_desc} fields may be added before this
3122
lookup to refine the search.
3123
 
3124 24 jeremybenn
Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
3125
architecture.  Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
3126
defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
3127
However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
3128
so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
3129
defaults from @var{arches}.
3130
 
3131 131 jeremybenn
@node Creating a New Architecture
3132
@subsection Creating a New Architecture
3133
@cindex @code{struct gdbarch} creation
3134
 
3135
@findex gdbarch_alloc
3136
@cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} when allocating new @code{gdbarch}
3137
If no architecture is found, then a new architecture must be created,
3138
by calling @code{gdbarch_alloc} using the supplied @code{@w{struct
3139
gdbarch_info}} and any additional custom target specific
3140
information in a @code{struct gdbarch_tdep}.  The prototype for
3141
@code{gdbarch_alloc} is:
3142
 
3143
@smallexample
3144
struct gdbarch *gdbarch_alloc (const struct gdbarch_info *@var{info},
3145
                               struct gdbarch_tdep       *@var{tdep});
3146
@end smallexample
3147
 
3148
@cindex @code{set_gdbarch} functions
3149
@cindex @code{gdbarch} accessor functions
3150
The newly created struct gdbarch must then be populated.  Although
3151
there are default values, in most cases they are not what is
3152
required.
3153
 
3154
For each element, @var{X}, there is are a pair of corresponding accessor
3155
functions, one to set the value of that element,
3156
@code{set_gdbarch_@var{X}}, the second to either get the value of an
3157
element (if it is a variable) or to apply the element (if it is a
3158
function), @code{gdbarch_@var{X}}.  Note that both accessor functions
3159
take a pointer to the @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} as first
3160
argument.  Populating the new @code{gdbarch} should use the
3161
@code{set_gdbarch} functions.
3162
 
3163
The following sections identify the main elements that should be set
3164
in this way.  This is not the complete list, but represents the
3165
functions and elements that must commonly be specified for a new
3166
architecture.  Many of the functions and variables are described in the
3167
header file @file{gdbarch.h}.
3168
 
3169
This is the main work in defining a new architecture.  Implementing the
3170
set of functions to populate the @code{struct gdbarch}.
3171
 
3172
@cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} definition
3173
@code{struct gdbarch_tdep} is not defined within @value{GDBN}---it is up
3174
to the user to define this struct if it is needed to hold custom target
3175
information that is not covered by the standard @code{@w{struct
3176
gdbarch}}.  For example with the OpenRISC 1000 architecture it is used to
3177
hold the number of matchpoints available in the target (along with other
3178
information).
3179
 
3180
If there is no additional target specific information, it can be set to
3181
@code{NULL}.
3182
 
3183 24 jeremybenn
@node Registers and Memory
3184
@section Registers and Memory
3185
 
3186
@value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
3187
@value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
3188
block of memory.  Each register may have a different size.
3189
 
3190
@value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
3191
compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
3192
that they do match up accurately.  The only way to make this work is
3193
to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
3194
and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
3195
 
3196
@value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
3197
 
3198
@node Pointers and Addresses
3199
@section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
3200
@cindex pointer representation
3201
@cindex address representation
3202
@cindex word-addressed machines
3203
@cindex separate data and code address spaces
3204
@cindex spaces, separate data and code address
3205
@cindex address spaces, separate data and code
3206
@cindex code pointers, word-addressed
3207
@cindex converting between pointers and addresses
3208
@cindex D10V addresses
3209
 
3210
On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
3211
indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
3212
whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to.  On such
3213
machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
3214
However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
3215
address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
3216
identity, and allows a larger code address space.
3217
 
3218 131 jeremybenn
@c D10V is gone from sources - more current example?
3219
 
3220 24 jeremybenn
For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
3221
instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
3222
actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions.  However, since you can't
3223
jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
3224
full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
3225
If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
3226
then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
3227
However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
3228
low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
3229
zero---byte addresses waste two bits.  So instead of byte addresses,
3230
the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
3231
refer to code.  Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
3232
code space.
3233
 
3234
However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
3235
forms on the D10V.  The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
3236
@code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
3237
@code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
3238
 
3239
(The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
3240
affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
3241
going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
3242
 
3243
To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
3244
one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
3245
byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
3246
of an address of a particular type of data.  In the example above,
3247
@code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
3248
@code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
3249
@value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
3250
and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
3251
 
3252
Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
3253
processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly.  Thus,
3254
each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
3255
distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
3256
clean up some architecture-independent code.
3257
 
3258
Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
3259
 
3260
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
3261
Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
3262
@var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
3263
appropriate for the current architecture.  This yields an address
3264
@value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc.  Note that
3265
@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3266
inferior's.
3267
 
3268
For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3269
extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
3270
@var{buf} and returns it.  However, if the current architecture is the
3271
D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
3272
@var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
3273
 
3274
If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3275
will signal an internal error.
3276
@end deftypefun
3277
 
3278
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3279
Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
3280
pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture.  Note that
3281
@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3282
inferior's.
3283
 
3284
For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3285
stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
3286
appropriate length in @var{buf}.  However, if the current architecture
3287
is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
3288
a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
3289
 
3290
If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3291
will signal an internal error.
3292
@end deftypefun
3293
 
3294
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
3295
Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
3296
as appropriate for the current architecture.
3297
 
3298
This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
3299
For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
3300
described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
3301
@end deftypefun
3302
 
3303
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3304
Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
3305
the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
3306
This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
3307
above for @code{store_typed_address}.
3308
@end deftypefun
3309
 
3310
Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
3311
relationship between pointers and addresses.  These have default
3312
definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
3313
simple unsigned byte addresses.
3314
 
3315
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3316
Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3317
appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
3318
address the pointer refers to.
3319
 
3320
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3321
C@t{++} reference type.
3322
@end deftypefun
3323
 
3324
@deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3325
Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3326
@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3327
 
3328
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3329
C@t{++} reference type.
3330
@end deftypefun
3331
 
3332
@node Address Classes
3333
@section Address Classes
3334
@cindex address classes
3335
@cindex DW_AT_byte_size
3336
@cindex DW_AT_address_class
3337
 
3338
Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
3339
via the debug information.  For example, some programming environments
3340
define addresses of several different sizes.  If the debug information
3341
distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
3342
info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
3343
address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
3344
following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
3345
types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
3346
a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
3347
 
3348
@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3349
Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
3350
is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
3351
This function is normally called from within a symbol reader.  See
3352
@file{dwarf2read.c}.
3353
@end deftypefun
3354
 
3355 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefun {char *} gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3356 24 jeremybenn
Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3357
its name.
3358
@end deftypefun
3359 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *@var{type_flags_ptr})
3360 24 jeremybenn
Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3361
for that address class qualifier.
3362
@end deftypefun
3363
 
3364
Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3365
the address class functions are defined by default.  Predicate
3366
functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3367
 
3368
Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
3369
32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported.  Furthermore,
3370
suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3371
uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3372
of these "short" pointers.  The following functions could be defined
3373
to implement the address class functions:
3374
 
3375
@smallexample
3376
somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3377
                                   int dwarf2_addr_class)
3378
@{
3379
  if (byte_size == 2)
3380
    return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3381
  else
3382
    return 0;
3383
@}
3384
 
3385
static char *
3386
somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3387
@{
3388
  if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3389
    return "short";
3390
  else
3391
    return NULL;
3392
@}
3393
 
3394
int
3395
somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3396
                                           int *type_flags_ptr)
3397
@{
3398
  if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3399
    @{
3400
      *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3401
      return 1;
3402
    @}
3403
  else
3404
    return 0;
3405
@}
3406
@end smallexample
3407
 
3408
The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3409 131 jeremybenn
to indicate the presence of one of these ``short'' pointers.  For
3410
example if the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is
3411
one of these short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following
3412
behavior:
3413 24 jeremybenn
 
3414
@smallexample
3415
(gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3416
type = int * @@short
3417
@end smallexample
3418
 
3419
 
3420 131 jeremybenn
@node Register Representation
3421
@section Register Representation
3422
 
3423
@menu
3424
* Raw and Cooked Registers::
3425
* Register Architecture Functions & Variables::
3426
* Register Information Functions::
3427
* Register and Memory Data::
3428
* Register Caching::
3429
@end menu
3430
 
3431
@node Raw and Cooked Registers
3432
@subsection Raw and Cooked Registers
3433 24 jeremybenn
@cindex raw register representation
3434 131 jeremybenn
@cindex cooked register representation
3435
@cindex representations, raw and cooked registers
3436 24 jeremybenn
 
3437 131 jeremybenn
@value{GDBN} considers registers to be a set with members numbered
3438
linearly from 0 upwards.  The first part of that set corresponds to real
3439
physical registers, the second part to any @dfn{pseudo-registers}.
3440
Pseudo-registers have no independent physical existence, but are useful
3441
representations of information within the architecture.  For example the
3442
OpenRISC 1000 architecture has up to 32 general purpose registers, which
3443
are typically represented as 32-bit (or 64-bit) integers.  However the
3444
GPRs are also used as operands to the floating point operations, and it
3445
could be convenient to define a set of pseudo-registers, to show the
3446
GPRs represented as floating point values.
3447 24 jeremybenn
 
3448 131 jeremybenn
For any architecture, the implementer will decide on a mapping from
3449
hardware to @value{GDBN} register numbers.  The registers corresponding to real
3450
hardware are referred to as @dfn{raw} registers, the remaining registers are
3451
@dfn{pseudo-registers}.  The total register set (raw and pseudo) is called
3452
the @dfn{cooked} register set.
3453 24 jeremybenn
 
3454
 
3455 131 jeremybenn
@node Register Architecture Functions & Variables
3456
@subsection Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture
3457
@cindex @code{gdbarch} register architecture functions
3458 24 jeremybenn
 
3459 131 jeremybenn
These @code{struct gdbarch} functions and variables specify the number
3460
and type of registers in the architecture.
3461 24 jeremybenn
 
3462 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR read_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache})
3463
@end deftypefn
3464
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void write_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{val})
3465 24 jeremybenn
 
3466 131 jeremybenn
Read or write the program counter.  The default value of both
3467
functions is @code{NULL} (no function available).  If the program
3468
counter is just an ordinary register, it can be specified in
3469
@code{struct gdbarch} instead (see @code{pc_regnum} below) and it will
3470
be read or written using the standard routines to access registers.  This
3471
function need only be specified if the program counter is not an
3472
ordinary register.
3473 24 jeremybenn
 
3474 131 jeremybenn
Any register information can be obtained using the supplied register
3475
cache, @var{regcache}.  @xref{Register Caching, , Register Caching}.
3476 24 jeremybenn
 
3477 131 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
3478 24 jeremybenn
 
3479 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_read (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3480 24 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
3481 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_write (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3482 24 jeremybenn
 
3483 131 jeremybenn
These functions should be defined if there are any pseudo-registers.
3484
The default value is @code{NULL}.  @var{regnum} is the number of the
3485
register to read or write (which will be a @dfn{cooked} register
3486
number) and @var{buf} is the buffer where the value read will be
3487
placed, or from which the value to be written will be taken.  The
3488
value in the buffer may be converted to or from a signed or unsigned
3489
integral value using one of the utility functions (@pxref{Register and
3490
Memory Data, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3491
Representations}).
3492
 
3493
The access should be for the specified architecture,
3494
@var{gdbarch}.  Any register information can be obtained using the
3495
supplied register cache, @var{regcache}.  @xref{Register Caching, ,
3496
Register Caching}.
3497
 
3498 24 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
3499
 
3500 131 jeremybenn
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int sp_regnum
3501
@vindex sp_regnum
3502
@cindex stack pointer
3503
@cindex @kbd{$sp}
3504
 
3505
This specifies the register holding the stack pointer, which may be a
3506
raw or pseudo-register.  It defaults to -1 (not defined), but it is an
3507
error for it not to be defined.
3508
 
3509
The value of the stack pointer register can be accessed withing
3510
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$sp}.
3511
 
3512
@end deftypevr
3513
 
3514
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int pc_regnum
3515
@vindex pc_regnum
3516
@cindex program counter
3517
@cindex @kbd{$pc}
3518
 
3519
This specifies the register holding the program counter, which may be a
3520
raw or pseudo-register.  It defaults to -1 (not defined).  If
3521
@code{pc_regnum} is not defined, then the functions @code{read_pc} and
3522
@code{write_pc} (see above) must be defined.
3523
 
3524
The value of the program counter (whether defined as a register, or
3525
through @code{read_pc} and @code{write_pc}) can be accessed withing
3526
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$pc}.
3527
 
3528
@end deftypevr
3529
 
3530
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int ps_regnum
3531
@vindex ps_regnum
3532
@cindex processor status register
3533
@cindex status register
3534
@cindex @kbd{$ps}
3535
 
3536
This specifies the register holding the processor status (often called
3537
the status register), which may be a raw or pseudo-register.  It
3538
defaults to -1 (not defined).
3539
 
3540
If defined, the value of this register can be accessed withing
3541
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$ps}.
3542
 
3543
@end deftypevr
3544
 
3545
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int fp0_regnum
3546
@vindex fp0_regnum
3547
@cindex first floating point register
3548
 
3549
This specifies the first floating point register.  It defaults to
3550
0.  @code{fp0_regnum} is not needed unless the target offers support
3551
for floating point.
3552
 
3553
@end deftypevr
3554
 
3555
@node Register Information Functions
3556
@subsection Functions Giving Register Information
3557
@cindex @code{gdbarch} register information functions
3558
 
3559
These functions return information about registers.
3560
 
3561
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {const char *} register_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3562
 
3563
This function should convert a register number (raw or pseudo) to a
3564
register name (as a C @code{const char *}).  This is used both to
3565
determine the name of a register for output and to work out the meaning
3566
of any register names used as input.  The function may also return
3567
@code{NULL}, to indicate that @var{regnum} is not a valid register.
3568
 
3569
For example with the OpenRISC 1000, @value{GDBN} registers 0-31 are the
3570
General Purpose Registers, register 32 is the program counter and
3571
register 33 is the supervision register (i.e.@: the processor status
3572
register), which map to the strings @code{"gpr00"} through
3573
@code{"gpr31"}, @code{"pc"} and @code{"sr"} respectively.  This means
3574
that the @value{GDBN} command @kbd{print $gpr5} should print the value of
3575
the OR1K general purpose register 5@footnote{
3576
@cindex frame pointer
3577
@cindex @kbd{$fp}
3578
Historically, @value{GDBN} always had a concept of a frame pointer
3579
register, which could be accessed via the @value{GDBN} variable,
3580
@kbd{$fp}.  That concept is now deprecated, recognizing that not all
3581
architectures have a frame pointer.  However if an architecture does
3582
have a frame pointer register, and defines a register or
3583
pseudo-register with the name @code{"fp"}, then that register will be
3584
used as the value of the @kbd{$fp} variable.}.
3585
 
3586
The default value for this function is @code{NULL}, meaning
3587
undefined.  It should always be defined.
3588
 
3589
The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch}.
3590
 
3591 24 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
3592
 
3593 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct type *} register_type (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3594
 
3595
Given a register number, this function identifies the type of data it
3596
may be holding, specified as a @code{struct type}.  @value{GDBN} allows
3597
creation of arbitrary types, but a number of built in types are
3598
provided (@code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_int32} etc),
3599
together with functions to derive types from these.
3600
 
3601
Typically the program counter will have a type of ``pointer to
3602
function'' (it points to code), the frame pointer and stack pointer
3603
will have types of ``pointer to void'' (they point to data on the stack)
3604
and all other integer registers will have a type of 32-bit integer or
3605
64-bit integer.
3606
 
3607
This information guides the formatting when displaying register
3608
information.  The default value is @code{NULL} meaning no information is
3609
available to guide formatting when displaying registers.
3610
 
3611 24 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
3612
 
3613 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_registers_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, int @var{regnum}, int @var{all})
3614 24 jeremybenn
 
3615 131 jeremybenn
Define this function to print out one or all of the registers for the
3616
@value{GDBN} @kbd{info registers} command.  The default value is the
3617
function @code{default_print_registers_info}, which uses the register
3618
type information (see @code{register_type} above) to determine how each
3619
register should be printed.  Define a custom version of this function
3620
for fuller control over how the registers are displayed.
3621 24 jeremybenn
 
3622 131 jeremybenn
The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch},
3623
with output to the the file specified by the User Interface
3624
Independent Output file handle, @var{file} (@pxref{UI-Independent
3625
Output, , UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out}
3626
Functions}).
3627
 
3628
The registers should show their values in the frame specified by
3629
@var{frame}.  If @var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is zero, then all
3630
the ``significant'' registers should be shown (the implementer should
3631
decide which registers are ``significant'').  Otherwise only the value of
3632
the register specified by @var{regnum} should be output.  If
3633
@var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is non-zero (true), then the value of
3634
all registers should be shown.
3635
 
3636
By default @code{default_print_registers_info} prints one register per
3637
line, and if @var{all} is zero omits floating-point registers.
3638
 
3639 24 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
3640
 
3641 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_float_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3642 24 jeremybenn
 
3643 131 jeremybenn
Define this function to provide output about the floating point unit and
3644
registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info float} command respectively.
3645
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3646
will be provided.
3647
 
3648
The @var{gdbarch} and @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the same
3649
meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above.  The string
3650
@var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info float}
3651
command.
3652
 
3653
Define this function if the target supports floating point operations.
3654
 
3655 24 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
3656
 
3657 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_vector_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3658 24 jeremybenn
 
3659 131 jeremybenn
Define this function to provide output about the vector unit and
3660
registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info vector} command respectively.
3661
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3662
will be provided.
3663
 
3664
The @var{gdbarch}, @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the
3665
same meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above.  The
3666
string @var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info
3667
vector} command.
3668
 
3669
Define this function if the target supports vector operations.
3670
 
3671
@end deftypefn
3672
 
3673
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int register_reggroup_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum}, struct reggroup *@var{group})
3674
 
3675
@value{GDBN} groups registers into different categories (general,
3676
vector, floating point etc).  This function, given a register,
3677
@var{regnum}, and group, @var{group}, returns 1 (true) if the register
3678
is in the group and 0 (false) otherwise.
3679
 
3680
The information should be for the specified architecture,
3681
@var{gdbarch}
3682
 
3683
The default value is the function @code{default_register_reggroup_p}
3684
which will do a reasonable job based on the type of the register (see
3685
the function @code{register_type} above), with groups for general
3686
purpose registers, floating point registers, vector registers and raw
3687
(i.e not pseudo) registers.
3688
 
3689
@end deftypefn
3690
 
3691 24 jeremybenn
@node Register and Memory Data
3692 131 jeremybenn
@subsection Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3693 24 jeremybenn
@cindex register representation
3694
@cindex memory representation
3695
@cindex representations, register and memory
3696
@cindex register data formats, converting
3697
@cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3698
 
3699 131 jeremybenn
Some architectures have different representations of data objects,
3700
depending whether the object is held in a register or memory.  For
3701
example:
3702 24 jeremybenn
 
3703
@itemize @bullet
3704
 
3705
@item
3706
The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3707
floating-point registers.
3708
 
3709
@item
3710
The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers.  The
3711 131 jeremybenn
@code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80
3712
bits when stored in a register.
3713 24 jeremybenn
 
3714
@end itemize
3715
 
3716
In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3717
the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3718
the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3719
Interface.
3720
 
3721
For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3722
representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3723 131 jeremybenn
However, they do occasionally differ.  An architecture may define the
3724
following @code{struct gdbarch} functions to request conversions
3725
between the register and memory representations of a data type:
3726 24 jeremybenn
 
3727 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3728 24 jeremybenn
 
3729 131 jeremybenn
Return non-zero (true) if the representation of a data value stored in
3730
this register may be different to the representation of that same data
3731
value when stored in memory.  The default value is @code{NULL}
3732
(undefined).
3733 24 jeremybenn
 
3734 131 jeremybenn
If this function is defined and returns non-zero, the @code{struct
3735
gdbarch} functions @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3736
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} (see below) should be used to perform
3737
any necessary conversion.
3738 24 jeremybenn
 
3739 131 jeremybenn
If defined, this function should return zero for the register's native
3740
type, when no conversion is necessary.
3741
@end deftypefn
3742 24 jeremybenn
 
3743 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3744 24 jeremybenn
 
3745 131 jeremybenn
Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of
3746
type @var{type}.  The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value
3747
in raw format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at
3748
@var{to}.
3749 24 jeremybenn
 
3750 131 jeremybenn
@quotation
3751
@emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3752
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3753
arguments in different orders.
3754
@end quotation
3755
 
3756
@code{gdbarch_register_to_value} should only be used with registers
3757
for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3758
non-zero value.
3759
 
3760
@end deftypefn
3761
 
3762
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3763
 
3764 24 jeremybenn
Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3765
raw format.
3766
 
3767 131 jeremybenn
@quotation
3768
@emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3769
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3770
arguments in different orders.
3771
@end quotation
3772 24 jeremybenn
 
3773 131 jeremybenn
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} should only be used with registers
3774
for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3775
non-zero value.
3776 24 jeremybenn
 
3777
@end deftypefn
3778
 
3779 131 jeremybenn
@node Register Caching
3780
@subsection Register Caching
3781
@cindex register caching
3782
 
3783
Caching of registers is used, so that the target does not need to be
3784
accessed and reanalyzed multiple times for each register in
3785
circumstances where the register value cannot have changed.
3786
 
3787
@cindex @code{struct regcache}
3788
@value{GDBN} provides @code{struct regcache}, associated with a
3789
particular @code{struct gdbarch} to hold the cached values of the raw
3790
registers.  A set of functions is provided to access both the raw
3791
registers (with @code{raw} in their name) and the full set of cooked
3792
registers (with @code{cooked} in their name).  Functions are provided
3793
to ensure the register cache is kept synchronized with the values of
3794
the actual registers in the target.
3795
 
3796
Accessing registers through the @code{struct regcache} routines will
3797
ensure that the appropriate @code{struct gdbarch} functions are called
3798
when necessary to access the underlying target architecture.  In general
3799
users should use the @dfn{cooked} functions, since these will map to the
3800
@dfn{raw} functions automatically as appropriate.
3801
 
3802
@findex regcache_cooked_read
3803
@findex regcache_cooked_write
3804
@cindex @code{gdb_byte}
3805
@findex regcache_cooked_read_signed
3806
@findex regcache_cooked_read_unsigned
3807
@findex regcache_cooked_write_signed
3808
@findex regcache_cooked_write_unsigned
3809
The two key functions are @code{regcache_cooked_read} and
3810
@code{regcache_cooked_write} which read or write a register from or to
3811
a byte buffer (type @code{gdb_byte *}).  For convenience the wrapper
3812
functions @code{regcache_cooked_read_signed},
3813
@code{regcache_cooked_read_unsigned},
3814
@code{regcache_cooked_write_signed} and
3815
@code{regcache_cooked_write_unsigned} are provided, which read or
3816
write the value using the buffer and convert to or from an integral
3817
value as appropriate.
3818
 
3819 24 jeremybenn
@node Frame Interpretation
3820
@section Frame Interpretation
3821
 
3822 131 jeremybenn
@menu
3823
* All About Stack Frames::
3824
* Frame Handling Terminology::
3825
* Prologue Caches::
3826
* Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames::
3827
* Functions to Access Frame Data::
3828
* Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers::
3829
@end menu
3830
 
3831
@node All About Stack Frames
3832
@subsection All About Stack Frames
3833
 
3834
@value{GDBN} needs to understand the stack on which local (automatic)
3835
variables are stored.  The area of the stack containing all the local
3836
variables for a function invocation is known as the @dfn{stack frame}
3837
for that function (or colloquially just as the @dfn{frame}).  In turn the
3838
function that called the function will have its stack frame, and so on
3839
back through the chain of functions that have been called.
3840
 
3841
Almost all architectures have one register dedicated to point to the
3842
end of the stack (the @dfn{stack pointer}).  Many have a second register
3843
which points to the start of the currently active stack frame (the
3844
@dfn{frame pointer}).  The specific arrangements for an architecture are
3845
a key part of the ABI.
3846
 
3847
A diagram helps to explain this.  Here is a simple program to compute
3848
factorials:
3849
 
3850
@smallexample
3851
#include <stdio.h>
3852
int fact (int n)
3853
@{
3854
  if (0 == n)
3855
    @{
3856
      return 1;
3857
    @}
3858
  else
3859
    @{
3860
      return n * fact (n - 1);
3861
    @}
3862
@}
3863
 
3864
main ()
3865
@{
3866
  int i;
3867
 
3868
  for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
3869
    @{
3870
      int   f = fact (i);
3871
      printf ("%d! = %d\n", i, f);
3872
    @}
3873
@}
3874
@end smallexample
3875
 
3876
Consider the state of the stack when the code reaches line 6 after the
3877
main program has called @code{fact@w{ }(3)}.  The chain of function
3878
calls will be @code{main ()}, @code{fact@w{ }(3)}, @code{fact@w{
3879
}(2)}, @code{@w{fact (1)}} and @code{fact@w{ }(0)}.
3880
 
3881
In this illustration the stack is falling (as used for example by the
3882
OpenRISC 1000 ABI).  The stack pointer (SP) is at the end of the stack
3883
(lowest address) and the frame pointer (FP) is at the highest address
3884
in the current stack frame.  The following diagram shows how the stack
3885
looks.
3886
 
3887
@center @image{images/stack-frame,14cm}
3888
 
3889
In each stack frame, offset 0 from the stack pointer is the frame
3890
pointer of the previous frame and offset 4 (this is illustrating a
3891
32-bit architecture) from the stack pointer is the return address.
3892
Local variables are indexed from the frame pointer, with negative
3893
indexes.  In the function @code{fact}, offset -4 from the frame
3894
pointer is the argument @var{n}.  In the @code{main} function, offset
3895
-4 from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{i} and offset -8
3896
from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{f}@footnote{This is
3897
a simplified example for illustrative purposes only.  Good optimizing
3898
compilers would not put anything on the stack for such simple
3899
functions.  Indeed they might eliminate the recursion and use of the
3900
stack entirely!}.
3901
 
3902
It is very easy to get confused when examining stacks.  @value{GDBN}
3903
has terminology it uses rigorously throughout.  The stack frame of the
3904
function currently executing, or where execution stopped is numbered
3905
zero.  In this example frame #0 is the stack frame of the call to
3906
@code{fact@w{ }(0)}.  The stack frame of its calling function
3907
(@code{fact@w{ }(1)} in this case) is numbered #1 and so on back
3908
through the chain of calls.
3909
 
3910
The main @value{GDBN} data structure describing frames is
3911
 @code{@w{struct frame_info}}.  It is not used directly, but only via
3912
its accessor functions.  @code{frame_info} includes information about
3913
the registers in the frame and a pointer to the code of the function
3914
with which the frame is associated.  The entire stack is represented as
3915
a linked list of @code{frame_info} structs.
3916
 
3917
@node Frame Handling Terminology
3918
@subsection Frame Handling Terminology
3919
 
3920
It is easy to get confused when referencing stack frames.  @value{GDBN}
3921
uses some precise terminology.
3922
 
3923
@itemize @bullet
3924
 
3925
@item
3926
@cindex THIS frame
3927
@cindex stack frame, definition of THIS frame
3928
@cindex frame, definition of THIS frame
3929
@dfn{THIS} frame is the frame currently under consideration.
3930
 
3931
@item
3932
@cindex NEXT frame
3933
@cindex stack frame, definition of NEXT frame
3934
@cindex frame, definition of NEXT frame
3935
The @dfn{NEXT} frame, also sometimes called the inner or newer frame is the
3936
frame of the function called by the function of THIS frame.
3937
 
3938
@item
3939
@cindex PREVIOUS frame
3940
@cindex stack frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3941
@cindex frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3942
The @dfn{PREVIOUS} frame, also sometimes called the outer or older frame is
3943
the frame of the function which called the function of THIS frame.
3944
 
3945
@end itemize
3946
 
3947
So in the example in the previous section (@pxref{All About Stack
3948
Frames, , All About Stack Frames}), if THIS frame is #3 (the call to
3949
@code{fact@w{ }(3)}), the NEXT frame is frame #2 (the call to
3950
@code{fact@w{ }(2)}) and the PREVIOUS frame is frame #4 (the call to
3951
@code{main@w{ }()}).
3952
 
3953
@cindex innermost frame
3954
@cindex stack frame, definition of innermost frame
3955
@cindex frame, definition of innermost frame
3956
The @dfn{innermost} frame is the frame of the current executing
3957
function, or where the program stopped, in this example, in the middle
3958
of the call to @code{@w{fact (0))}}.  It is always numbered frame #0.
3959
 
3960
@cindex base of a frame
3961
@cindex stack frame, definition of base of a frame
3962
@cindex frame, definition of base of a frame
3963
The @dfn{base} of a frame is the address immediately before the start
3964
of the NEXT frame.  For a stack which grows down in memory (a
3965
@dfn{falling} stack) this will be the lowest address and for a stack
3966
which grows up in memory (a @dfn{rising} stack) this will be the
3967
highest address in the frame.
3968
 
3969
@value{GDBN} functions to analyze the stack are typically given a
3970
pointer to the NEXT frame to determine information about THIS
3971
frame.  Information about THIS frame includes data on where the
3972
registers of the PREVIOUS frame are stored in this stack frame.  In
3973
this example the frame pointer of the PREVIOUS frame is stored at
3974
offset 0 from the stack pointer of THIS frame.
3975
 
3976
@cindex unwinding
3977
@cindex stack frame, definition of unwinding
3978
@cindex frame, definition of unwinding
3979
The process whereby a function is given a pointer to the NEXT
3980
frame to work out information about THIS frame is referred to as
3981
@dfn{unwinding}.  The @value{GDBN} functions involved in this typically
3982
include unwind in their name.
3983
 
3984
@cindex sniffing
3985
@cindex stack frame, definition of sniffing
3986
@cindex frame, definition of sniffing
3987
The process of analyzing a target to determine the information that
3988
should go in struct frame_info is called @dfn{sniffing}.  The functions
3989
that carry this out are called sniffers and typically include sniffer
3990
in their name.  More than one sniffer may be required to extract all
3991
the information for a particular frame.
3992
 
3993
@cindex sentinel frame
3994
@cindex stack frame, definition of sentinel frame
3995
@cindex frame, definition of sentinel frame
3996
Because so many functions work using the NEXT frame, there is an issue
3997
about addressing the innermost frame---it has no NEXT frame.  To solve
3998
this @value{GDBN} creates a dummy frame #-1, known as the
3999
@dfn{sentinel} frame.
4000
 
4001
@node Prologue Caches
4002
@subsection Prologue Caches
4003
 
4004
@cindex function prologue
4005
@cindex prologue of a function
4006
All the frame sniffing functions typically examine the code at the
4007
start of the corresponding function, to determine the state of
4008
registers.  The ABI will save old values and set new values of key
4009
registers at the start of each function in what is known as the
4010
function @dfn{prologue}.
4011
 
4012
@cindex prologue cache
4013
For any particular stack frame this data does not change, so all the
4014
standard unwinding functions, in addition to receiving a pointer to
4015
the NEXT frame as their first argument, receive a pointer to a
4016
@dfn{prologue cache} as their second argument.  This can be used to store
4017
values associated with a particular frame, for reuse on subsequent
4018
calls involving the same frame.
4019
 
4020
It is up to the user to define the structure used (it is a
4021
@code{void@w{ }*} pointer) and arrange allocation and deallocation of
4022
storage.  However for general use, @value{GDBN} provides
4023
@code{@w{struct trad_frame_cache}}, with a set of accessor
4024
routines.  This structure holds the stack and code address of
4025
THIS frame, the base address of the frame, a pointer to the
4026
struct @code{frame_info} for the NEXT frame and details of
4027
where the registers of the PREVIOUS frame may be found in THIS
4028
frame.
4029
 
4030
Typically the first time any sniffer function is called with NEXT
4031
frame, the prologue sniffer for THIS frame will be @code{NULL}.  The
4032
sniffer will analyze the frame, allocate a prologue cache structure
4033
and populate it.  Subsequent calls using the same NEXT frame will
4034
pass in this prologue cache, so the data can be returned with no
4035
additional analysis.
4036
 
4037
@node Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4038
@subsection Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4039
 
4040
These struct @code{gdbarch} functions and variable should be defined
4041
to provide analysis of the stack frame and allow it to be adjusted as
4042
required.
4043
 
4044
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR skip_prologue (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{pc})
4045
 
4046
The prologue of a function is the code at the beginning of the
4047
function which sets up the stack frame, saves the return address
4048
etc.  The code representing the behavior of the function starts after
4049
the prologue.
4050
 
4051
This function skips past the prologue of a function if the program
4052
counter, @var{pc}, is within the prologue of a function.  The result is
4053
the program counter immediately after the prologue.  With modern
4054
optimizing compilers, this may be a far from trivial exercise.  However
4055
the required information may be within the binary as DWARF2 debugging
4056
information, making the job much easier.
4057
 
4058
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined).  This function should always
4059
be provided, but can take advantage of DWARF2 debugging information,
4060
if that is available.
4061
 
4062
@end deftypefn
4063
 
4064
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int inner_than (CORE_ADDR @var{lhs}, CORE_ADDR @var{rhs})
4065
@findex core_addr_lessthan
4066
@findex core_addr_greaterthan
4067
 
4068
Given two frame or stack pointers, return non-zero (true) if the first
4069
represents the @dfn{inner} stack frame and 0 (false) otherwise.  This
4070
is used to determine whether the target has a stack which grows up in
4071
memory (rising stack) or grows down in memory (falling stack).
4072
@xref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for an
4073
explanation of @dfn{inner} frames.
4074
 
4075
The default value of this function is @code{NULL} and it should always
4076
be defined.  However for almost all architectures one of the built-in
4077
functions can be used: @code{core_addr_lessthan} (for stacks growing
4078
down in memory) or @code{core_addr_greaterthan} (for stacks growing up
4079
in memory).
4080
 
4081
@end deftypefn
4082
 
4083
@anchor{frame_align}
4084
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR frame_align (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
4085
@findex align_down
4086
@findex align_up
4087
 
4088
The architecture may have constraints on how its frames are
4089
aligned.  For example the OpenRISC 1000 ABI requires stack frames to be
4090
double-word aligned, but 32-bit versions of the architecture allocate
4091
single-word values to the stack.  Thus extra padding may be needed at
4092
the end of a stack frame.
4093
 
4094
Given a proposed address for the stack pointer, this function
4095
returns a suitably aligned address (by expanding the stack frame).
4096
 
4097
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined).  This function should be defined
4098
for any architecture where it is possible the stack could become
4099
misaligned.  The utility functions @code{align_down} (for falling
4100
stacks) and @code{align_up} (for rising stacks) will facilitate the
4101
implementation of this function.
4102
 
4103
@end deftypefn
4104
 
4105
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int frame_red_zone_size
4106
 
4107
Some ABIs reserve space beyond the end of the stack for use by leaf
4108
functions without prologue or epilogue or by exception handlers (for
4109
example the OpenRISC 1000).
4110
 
4111
This is known as a @dfn{red zone} (AMD terminology).  The @sc{amd64}
4112
(nee x86-64) ABI documentation refers to the @dfn{red zone} when
4113
describing this scratch area.
4114
 
4115
The default value is 0.  Set this field if the architecture has such a
4116
red zone.  The value must be aligned as required by the ABI (see
4117
@code{frame_align} above for an explanation of stack frame alignment).
4118
 
4119
@end deftypevr
4120
 
4121
@node Functions to Access Frame Data
4122
@subsection Functions to Access Frame Data
4123
 
4124
These functions provide access to key registers and arguments in the
4125
stack frame.
4126
 
4127
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_pc (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4128
 
4129
This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame (@pxref{All
4130
About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for how frames are
4131
represented) and returns the value of the program counter in the
4132
PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called THIS
4133
one).  This is commonly referred to as the @dfn{return address}.
4134
 
4135
The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4136
is typically no more than:
4137
 
4138
@smallexample
4139
ULONGEST pc;
4140
pc = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_PC_REGNUM);
4141
return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
4142
@end smallexample
4143
 
4144
@end deftypefn
4145
 
4146
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_sp (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4147
 
4148
This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame
4149
(@pxref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how
4150
frames are represented) and returns the value of the stack pointer in
4151
the PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called
4152
THIS one).
4153
 
4154
The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4155
is typically no more than:
4156
 
4157
@smallexample
4158
ULONGEST sp;
4159
sp = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_SP_REGNUM);
4160
return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
4161
@end smallexample
4162
 
4163
@end deftypefn
4164
 
4165
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int frame_num_args (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
4166
 
4167
This function is given a pointer to THIS stack frame (@pxref{All
4168
About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how frames are
4169
represented), and returns the number of arguments that are being
4170
passed, or -1 if not known.
4171
 
4172
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined), in which case the number of
4173
arguments passed on any stack frame is always unknown.  For many
4174
architectures this will be a suitable default.
4175
 
4176
@end deftypefn
4177
 
4178
@node Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4179
@subsection Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4180
 
4181
When a program stops, @value{GDBN} needs to construct the chain of
4182
struct @code{frame_info} representing the state of the stack using
4183
appropriate @dfn{sniffers}.
4184
 
4185
Each architecture requires appropriate sniffers, but they do not form
4186
entries in @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, since more than one sniffer may
4187
be required and a sniffer may be suitable for more than one
4188
@code{@w{struct gdbarch}}.  Instead sniffers are associated with
4189
architectures using the following functions.
4190
 
4191
@itemize @bullet
4192
 
4193
@item
4194
@findex frame_unwind_append_sniffer
4195
@code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer to
4196
analyze THIS frame when given a pointer to the NEXT frame.
4197
 
4198
@item
4199
@findex frame_base_append_sniffer
4200
@code{frame_base_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer
4201
which can determine information about the base of a stack frame.
4202
 
4203
@item
4204
@findex frame_base_set_default
4205
@code{frame_base_set_default} is used to specify the default base
4206
sniffer.
4207
 
4208
@end itemize
4209
 
4210
These functions all take a reference to @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, so
4211
they are associated with a specific architecture.  They are usually
4212
called in the @code{gdbarch} initialization function, after the
4213
@code{gdbarch} struct has been set up.  Unless a default has been set, the
4214
most recently appended sniffer will be tried first.
4215
 
4216
The main frame unwinding sniffer (as set by
4217
@code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer)} returns a structure specifying
4218
a set of sniffing functions:
4219
 
4220
@cindex @code{frame_unwind}
4221
@smallexample
4222
struct frame_unwind
4223
@{
4224
   enum frame_type            type;
4225
   frame_this_id_ftype       *this_id;
4226
   frame_prev_register_ftype *prev_register;
4227
   const struct frame_data   *unwind_data;
4228
   frame_sniffer_ftype       *sniffer;
4229
   frame_prev_pc_ftype       *prev_pc;
4230
   frame_dealloc_cache_ftype *dealloc_cache;
4231
@};
4232
@end smallexample
4233
 
4234
The @code{type} field indicates the type of frame this sniffer can
4235
handle: normal, dummy (@pxref{Functions Creating Dummy Frames, ,
4236
Functions Creating Dummy Frames}), signal handler or sentinel.  Signal
4237
handlers sometimes have their own simplified stack structure for
4238
efficiency, so may need their own handlers.
4239
 
4240
The @code{unwind_data} field holds additional information which may be
4241
relevant to particular types of frame.  For example it may hold
4242
additional information for signal handler frames.
4243
 
4244
The remaining fields define functions that yield different types of
4245
information when given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame.  Not all
4246
functions need be provided.  If an entry is @code{NULL}, the next sniffer will
4247
be tried instead.
4248
 
4249
@itemize @bullet
4250
 
4251
@item
4252
@code{this_id} determines the stack pointer and function (code
4253
entry point) for THIS stack frame.
4254
 
4255
@item
4256
@code{prev_register} determines where the values of registers for
4257
the PREVIOUS stack frame are stored in THIS stack frame.
4258
 
4259
@item
4260
@code{sniffer} takes a look at THIS frame's registers to
4261
determine if this is the appropriate unwinder.
4262
 
4263
@item
4264
@code{prev_pc} determines the program counter for THIS
4265
frame.  Only needed if the program counter is not an ordinary register
4266
(@pxref{Register Architecture Functions & Variables,
4267
, Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture}).
4268
 
4269
@item
4270
@code{dealloc_cache} frees any additional memory associated with
4271
the prologue cache for this frame (@pxref{Prologue Caches, , Prologue
4272
Caches}).
4273
 
4274
@end itemize
4275
 
4276
In general it is only the @code{this_id} and @code{prev_register}
4277
fields that need be defined for custom sniffers.
4278
 
4279
The frame base sniffer is much simpler.  It is a @code{@w{struct
4280
frame_base}}, which refers to the corresponding @code{frame_unwind}
4281
struct and whose fields refer to functions yielding various addresses
4282
within the frame.
4283
 
4284
@cindex @code{frame_base}
4285
@smallexample
4286
struct frame_base
4287
@{
4288
   const struct frame_unwind *unwind;
4289
   frame_this_base_ftype     *this_base;
4290
   frame_this_locals_ftype   *this_locals;
4291
   frame_this_args_ftype     *this_args;
4292
@};
4293
@end smallexample
4294
 
4295
All the functions referred to take a pointer to the NEXT frame as
4296
argument.  The function referred to by @code{this_base} returns the
4297
base address of THIS frame, the function referred to by
4298
@code{this_locals} returns the base address of local variables in THIS
4299
frame and the function referred to by @code{this_args} returns the
4300
base address of the function arguments in this frame.
4301
 
4302
As described above, the base address of a frame is the address
4303
immediately before the start of the NEXT frame.  For a falling
4304
stack, this is the lowest address in the frame and for a rising stack
4305
it is the highest address in the frame.  For most architectures the
4306
same address is also the base address for local variables and
4307
arguments, in which case the same function can be used for all three
4308
entries@footnote{It is worth noting that if it cannot be determined in any
4309
other way (for example by there being a register with the name
4310
@code{"fp"}), then the result of the @code{this_base} function will be
4311
used as the value of the frame pointer variable @kbd{$fp} in
4312
@value{GDBN}.  This is very often not correct (for example with the
4313
OpenRISC 1000, this value is the stack pointer, @kbd{$sp}).  In this
4314
case a register (raw or pseudo) with the name @code{"fp"} should be
4315
defined.  It will be used in preference as the value of @kbd{$fp}.}.
4316
 
4317 24 jeremybenn
@node Inferior Call Setup
4318
@section Inferior Call Setup
4319 131 jeremybenn
@cindex calls to the inferior
4320 24 jeremybenn
 
4321 131 jeremybenn
@menu
4322
* About Dummy Frames::
4323
* Functions Creating Dummy Frames::
4324
@end menu
4325 24 jeremybenn
 
4326 131 jeremybenn
@node About Dummy Frames
4327
@subsection About Dummy Frames
4328
@cindex dummy frames
4329 24 jeremybenn
 
4330 131 jeremybenn
@value{GDBN} can call functions in the target code (for example by
4331
using the @kbd{call} or @kbd{print} commands).  These functions may be
4332
breakpointed, and it is essential that if a function does hit a
4333
breakpoint, commands like @kbd{backtrace} work correctly.
4334 24 jeremybenn
 
4335 131 jeremybenn
This is achieved by making the stack look as though the function had
4336
been called from the point where @value{GDBN} had previously stopped.
4337
This requires that @value{GDBN} can set up stack frames appropriate for
4338
such function calls.
4339
 
4340
@node Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4341
@subsection Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4342
 
4343
The following functions provide the functionality to set up such
4344
@dfn{dummy} stack frames.
4345
 
4346
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_call (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct value *@var{function}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{bp_addr}, int  @var{nargs}, struct value **@var{args}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, int  @var{struct_return}, CORE_ADDR @var{struct_addr})
4347
 
4348
This function sets up a dummy stack frame for the function about to be
4349
called.  @code{push_dummy_call} is given the arguments to be passed
4350
and must copy them into registers or push them on to the stack as
4351
appropriate for the ABI.
4352
 
4353
@var{function} is a pointer to the function
4354
that will be called and @var{regcache} the register cache from which
4355
values should be obtained.  @var{bp_addr} is the address to which the
4356
function should return (which is breakpointed, so @value{GDBN} can
4357
regain control, hence the name).  @var{nargs} is the number of
4358
arguments to pass and @var{args} an array containing the argument
4359
values.  @var{struct_return} is non-zero (true) if the function returns
4360
a structure, and if so @var{struct_addr} is the address in which the
4361
structure should be returned.
4362
 
4363
 After calling this function, @value{GDBN} will pass control to the
4364
target at the address of the function, which will find the stack and
4365
registers set up just as expected.
4366
 
4367
The default value of this function is @code{NULL} (undefined).  If the
4368
function is not defined, then @value{GDBN} will not allow the user to
4369
call functions within the target being debugged.
4370
 
4371
@end deftypefn
4372
 
4373
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct frame_id} unwind_dummy_id (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4374
 
4375
This is the inverse of @code{push_dummy_call} which restores the stack
4376
pointer and program counter after a call to evaluate a function using
4377
a dummy stack frame.  The result is a @code{@w{struct frame_id}}, which
4378
contains the value of the stack pointer and program counter to be
4379
used.
4380
 
4381
The NEXT frame pointer is provided as argument,
4382
@var{next_frame}.  THIS frame is the frame of the dummy function,
4383
which can be unwound, to yield the required stack pointer and program
4384
counter from the PREVIOUS frame.
4385
 
4386
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined).  If @code{push_dummy_call} is
4387
defined, then this function should also be defined.
4388
 
4389
@end deftypefn
4390
 
4391
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_code (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, CORE_ADDR @var{funaddr}, struct value **@var{args}, int  @var{nargs}, struct type *@var{value_type}, CORE_ADDR *@var{real_pc}, CORE_ADDR *@var{bp_addr}, struct regcache *@var{regcache})
4392
 
4393
If this function is not defined (its default value is @code{NULL}), a dummy
4394
call will use the entry point of the currently loaded code on the
4395
target as its return address.  A temporary breakpoint will be set
4396
there, so the location must be writable and have room for a
4397
breakpoint.
4398
 
4399
It is possible that this default is not suitable.  It might not be
4400
writable (in ROM possibly), or the ABI might require code to be
4401
executed on return from a call to unwind the stack before the
4402
breakpoint is encountered.
4403
 
4404
If either of these is the case, then push_dummy_code should be defined
4405
to push an instruction sequence onto the end of the stack to which the
4406
dummy call should return.
4407
 
4408
The arguments are essentially the same as those to
4409
@code{push_dummy_call}.  However the function is provided with the
4410
type of the function result, @var{value_type}, @var{bp_addr} is used
4411
to return a value (the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4412
should be inserted) and @var{real pc} is used to specify the resume
4413
address when starting the call sequence.  The function should return
4414
the updated innermost stack address.
4415
 
4416
@quotation
4417
@emph{Note:} This does require that code in the stack can be executed.
4418
Some Harvard architectures may not allow this.
4419
@end quotation
4420
 
4421
@end deftypefn
4422
 
4423
@node Defining Other Architecture Features
4424
@section Defining Other Architecture Features
4425
 
4426
This section describes other functions and values in @code{gdbarch},
4427
together with some useful macros, that you can use to define the
4428
target architecture.
4429
 
4430 24 jeremybenn
@table @code
4431
 
4432
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4433
@findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
4434
If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
4435
really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
4436
@var{addr}.  This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
4437
in all contexts.
4438
 
4439
For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
4440
2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
4441
instruction.  Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
4442
boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
4443
address of the instruction.  @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
4444
example look like that:
4445
@smallexample
4446
arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
4447
@{
4448
  return (addr &= ~0x3);
4449
@}
4450
@end smallexample
4451
 
4452
@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
4453
@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
4454
If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
4455
referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
4456
and return 1.  If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
4457
return 0.
4458
 
4459
The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
4460
@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
4461
possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
4462
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4463
 
4464
@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4465
@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
4466
Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
4467
has been defined.
4468
 
4469
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
4470
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
4471
Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
4472
the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
4473
used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class.  The value
4474
returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
4475
@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
4476
values or'd together.
4477
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4478
 
4479
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4480
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
4481
Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
4482
been defined.
4483
 
4484
@item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
4485
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
4486
Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
4487
flags given by @var{type_flags}.
4488
 
4489
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
4490
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
4491
Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
4492
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4493
 
4494
@item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
4495
@findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
4496
Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
4497
@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
4498
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
4499
C@t{++} reference type.
4500
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4501
 
4502
@item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
4503
@findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
4504
Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
4505
parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
4506
original type, rather than the promoted type.
4507
 
4508
@item gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch})
4509
@findex gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4510
This is used if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match
4511 131 jeremybenn
the endianism of the target byte order.  A value of 1 means that the bits
4512 24 jeremybenn
are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
4513
 
4514
@item set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bits_big_endian})
4515
@findex set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4516
Calling set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian with a value of 1 indicates that the
4517
bits in the target are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 indicates
4518
little-endian.
4519
 
4520
@item BREAKPOINT
4521
@findex BREAKPOINT
4522
This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
4523
memory where a breakpoint is set.  Although it's common to use a trap
4524
instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
4525
pattern could be an invalid instruction.  The breakpoint must be no
4526
longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
4527
 
4528
@code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
4529
@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4530
 
4531
@item BIG_BREAKPOINT
4532
@itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4533
@findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4534
@findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
4535
Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
4536
 
4537
@code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
4538
favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4539
 
4540
@item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
4541
@findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
4542
@anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
4543
contents and size of a breakpoint instruction.  It returns a pointer to
4544 131 jeremybenn
a static string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
4545 24 jeremybenn
length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
4546
counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
4547 131 jeremybenn
breakpoint should be inserted.  May return @code{NULL} to indicate that
4548
software breakpoints are not supported.
4549 24 jeremybenn
 
4550
Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
4551
not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
4552
instruction.  The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
4553
instruction of the architecture.
4554
 
4555 131 jeremybenn
Provided breakpoint bytes can be also used by @code{bp_loc_is_permanent} to
4556
detect permanent breakpoints.  @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} should return
4557
an unchanged memory copy if it was called for a location with permanent
4558
breakpoint as some architectures use breakpoint instructions containing
4559
arbitrary parameter value.
4560
 
4561 24 jeremybenn
Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
4562
 
4563
@item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4564
@itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4565
@findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
4566
@findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
4567
Insert or remove memory based breakpoints.  Reasonable defaults
4568
(@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
4569
@code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
4570
provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
4571
architectures.  Architectures which may want to set
4572
@code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
4573
conventional manner.
4574
 
4575
It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
4576
custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
4577
@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
4578
reason.
4579
 
4580
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
4581
@findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
4582
@cindex breakpoint address adjusted
4583
Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
4584
address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
4585
breakpoint placement.  This method is not needed by most targets.
4586
 
4587
The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
4588
The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
4589
instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
4590
instruction or instruction bundle.  When the processor executes
4591
one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
4592
in parallel.
4593
 
4594
In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
4595
from distinct source statements into the same bundle.  The line number
4596
information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
4597
refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle.  So,
4598
if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
4599
statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
4600
instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
4601
(Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
4602
in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
4603
at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
4604
 
4605
The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
4606
breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
4607
the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
4608
 
4609
Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
4610
expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
4611
is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
4612
 
4613
@item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
4614
@findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
4615
See the file @file{inferior.h}.
4616
 
4617
This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
4618
(@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
4619
 
4620
@item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
4621
@findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
4622
This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
4623 131 jeremybenn
from an inferior process.
4624 24 jeremybenn
 
4625
@item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
4626
@findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
4627
This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
4628
written to the target.  This is often the case for program counters,
4629
status words, and other special registers.  This function returns 0 as
4630
default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
4631
 
4632
@item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
4633
@findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
4634
Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} represents data values of type
4635
@var{type} in a non-standard form.
4636
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4637
 
4638 131 jeremybenn
@item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4639
@findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4640
This function returns the number of the first floating point register,
4641
if the machine has such registers.  Otherwise, it returns -1.
4642
 
4643 24 jeremybenn
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
4644
@findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
4645
This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
4646
program encounters a breakpoint.  This is often the number of bytes in
4647
@code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always.  For most targets this value will be 0.
4648
 
4649
@item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
4650
@findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
4651
If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
4652
library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
4653
 
4654
@item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
4655
@findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
4656
Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
4657
If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4658
 
4659
@item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
4660
@findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
4661
Convert ECOFF register number  @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.  If
4662
not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4663
 
4664
@item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4665
@itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4666
@findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4667
@findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4668
If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
4669
look for to detect that GCC compiled the file.  The default symbols
4670
are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
4671
respectively.  (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
4672
 
4673
@item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4674
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4675 131 jeremybenn
This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp}
4676
will jump to, assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp}
4677
breakpoint.  It takes a @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the
4678
target PC value through this pointer.  It examines the current state
4679
of the machine as needed, typically by using a manually-determined
4680
offset into the @code{jmp_buf}.  (While we might like to get the offset
4681
from the target's @file{jmpbuf.h}, that header file cannot be assumed
4682
to be available when building a cross-debugger.)
4683 24 jeremybenn
 
4684
@item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4685
@findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4686
Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system.  This
4687
conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
4688 131 jeremybenn
feature-specific macros.  It was introduced in haste and we are
4689 24 jeremybenn
repenting at leisure.
4690
 
4691
@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4692
An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4693
support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4694
 
4695
@item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4696
@findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
4697
Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
4698
The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
4699
the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
4700
final `return from function call' instruction.
4701
 
4702
@item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
4703
@findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
4704
Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4705
trampoline that returns from a shared library.
4706
 
4707 131 jeremybenn
@item target_so_ops.in_dynsym_resolve_code (@var{pc})
4708
@findex in_dynsym_resolve_code
4709 24 jeremybenn
Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4710
dynamic linker.
4711
 
4712
@item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
4713
@findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
4714
Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
4715
should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
4716
function.  A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
4717
to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
4718
stepping will suffice.
4719
 
4720
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4721
@findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
4722
@cindex converting integers to addresses
4723
Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
4724
conversions specially.  Converts that value to an address according to
4725
the current architectures conventions.
4726
 
4727
@emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
4728
their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
4729
@code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
4730
computed by the target program.  Any deviation from this rule can cause
4731
major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully.  In
4732
other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
4733
conversions in clever and useful ways.  It has, however, been pointed
4734
out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
4735
to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
4736
disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}.  Adding an architecture
4737
method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
4738
@value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
4739
 
4740
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
4741
Addresses}.
4742
 
4743
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4744
@findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
4745
Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
4746
appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
4747
address the pointer refers to.
4748
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4749
 
4750
@item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
4751
@findex gdbarch_register_to_value
4752
Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
4753
@var{type}.
4754
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4755
 
4756
@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4757
@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
4758
Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
4759
form.
4760
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4761
 
4762
@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4763
@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
4764
Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
4765
form.
4766
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4767
 
4768
@item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
4769
@findex regset_from_core_section
4770
Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
4771
@var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
4772
 
4773
@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
4774
@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
4775
Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
4776
mechanism.  The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
4777
 
4778
@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
4779
@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
4780
A function that inserts or removes (depending on
4781
@var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
4782 131 jeremybenn
the next instruction.  See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
4783 24 jeremybenn
for examples.
4784
 
4785
@item set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing (@var{gdbarch}, @var{set})
4786
@findex set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing
4787
Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
4788
debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
4789
them.  So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
4790
address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
4791
linking faster.
4792
 
4793
Calling @code{set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing} with a non-zero
4794
argument @var{set} indicates that a particular set of hacks of this sort
4795
are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN} entries in stabs-format
4796
debugging information.  @code{N_SO} stabs mark the beginning and ending
4797
addresses of compilation units in the text segment.  @code{N_FUN} stabs
4798
mark the starts and ends of functions.
4799
 
4800
In this case, @value{GDBN} assumes two things:
4801
 
4802
@itemize @bullet
4803
@item
4804
@code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero.  Instead of using those
4805
addresses, you should find the address where the function starts by
4806
taking the function name from the stab, and then looking that up in the
4807
minsyms (the linker/assembler symbol table).  In other words, the stab
4808
has the name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place
4809
that carries the address.
4810
 
4811
@item
4812
@code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too.  You just look at the
4813
@code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab, and
4814
guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from them.
4815
@end itemize
4816
 
4817
@item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
4818
@findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
4819
@anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
4820
nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
4821
instead of value.
4822
 
4823
@item PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
4824
@findex PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
4825
A hook defined for XCOFF reading.
4826
 
4827
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
4828
@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
4829
@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
4830
the inferior function onto the stack.  In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
4831
code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
4832
the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
4833
 
4834
@var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
4835
function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
4836
 
4837
Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
4838
 
4839
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
4840
@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
4841
@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
4842
instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
4843
called function should return.
4844
 
4845
Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4846
should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
4847
the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
4848
 
4849
By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
4850
(@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
4851
reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
4852
 
4853 131 jeremybenn
This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4854 24 jeremybenn
 
4855
@item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
4856
@findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
4857
Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4858
regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4859
 
4860
@item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
4861
@findex gdbarch_return_value
4862
@anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
4863
type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
4864
would use.
4865
 
4866
@value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
4867
@code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
4868
in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
4869
value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
4870
passed in as the function's first parameter.
4871
 
4872
If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
4873
non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
4874
@var{regcache}.
4875
 
4876
If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
4877
non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
4878
@var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
4879
just returned function).
4880
 
4881
@emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
4882
store methods.  By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
4883
the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place.  If
4884
@value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
4885
instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
4886
return-value extract and store.}
4887
 
4888
@emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
4889
parameter, and such a parameter should not be added.  If an architecture
4890
that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
4891
then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
4892
@var{function} should be pursued.}
4893
 
4894
@emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
4895
to the inner most frame.  While replacing @var{regcache} with a
4896
@code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
4897
limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
4898
 
4899
@item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4900
@findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
4901
Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint.  @value{GDBN} normally
4902
steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
4903
re-inserting the breakpoint.  However, permanent breakpoints are
4904
hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
4905
doesn't work.  Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
4906
processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
4907
This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
4908
of a branch or jump.
4909
 
4910
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
4911
@findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
4912
If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
4913
the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
4914
that is at the start of the real function.
4915
 
4916 131 jeremybenn
@item int gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4917
@findex gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum
4918
If the frame pointer is in a register, use this function to return the
4919
number of that register.
4920 24 jeremybenn
 
4921
@item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4922
@findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4923
Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4924
regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4925
 
4926
@item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4927
@findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4928
The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable.  (Never defined in
4929
current sources.)
4930
 
4931
@item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4932
@findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4933
Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4934
 
4935
@item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4936
@findex gdbarch_char_signed
4937
Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4938
it should be unsigned.
4939
 
4940
The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4941
equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4942
character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4943
Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4944
on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4945
 
4946
@item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4947
@findex gdbarch_double_bit
4948
Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4949
 
4950
@item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4951
@findex gdbarch_float_bit
4952
Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4953
 
4954
@item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4955
@findex gdbarch_int_bit
4956
Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4957
 
4958
@item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4959
@findex gdbarch_long_bit
4960
Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4961
 
4962
@item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4963
@findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4964
Number of bits in a long double float;
4965
defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4966
 
4967
@item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4968
@findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4969
Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4970
@w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4971
 
4972
@item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4973
@findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4974
Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4975
@w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4976
 
4977
@item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4978
@findex gdbarch_short_bit
4979
Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4980
 
4981
@item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4982
@findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4983 131 jeremybenn
Returns a @code{(@var{register}, @var{offset})} pair representing the virtual
4984
frame pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}.  If virtual frame
4985
pointers are not used, a default definition simply returns
4986
@code{gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum} (or @code{gdbarch_sp_regnum}, if
4987
no frame pointer is defined), with an offset of zero.
4988 24 jeremybenn
 
4989 131 jeremybenn
@c need to explain virtual frame pointers, they are recorded in agent
4990
@c expressions for tracepoints
4991
 
4992 24 jeremybenn
@item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4993
If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4994
watchpoints.  @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4995
other related macros.
4996
 
4997
@item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
4998
@findex gdbarch_print_insn
4999
This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
5000
instruction.  It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
5001 131 jeremybenn
debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes.
5002
This usually points to a function in the @code{opcodes} library
5003
(@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).  @var{info} is a structure (of
5004
type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in the header file
5005
@file{include/dis-asm.h}, and used to pass information to the
5006
instruction decoding routine.
5007 24 jeremybenn
 
5008 131 jeremybenn
@item frame_id gdbarch_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
5009
@findex gdbarch_dummy_id
5010
@anchor{gdbarch_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
5011 24 jeremybenn
frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
5012
frame.  The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
5013 131 jeremybenn
previously saved by @code{call_function_by_hand}.
5014 24 jeremybenn
 
5015
@item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
5016
@findex gdbarch_value_to_register
5017
Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
5018
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
5019
 
5020
@end table
5021
 
5022
Motorola M68K target conditionals.
5023
 
5024
@ftable @code
5025
@item BPT_VECTOR
5026
Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector.  If
5027
not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
5028
 
5029
@item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
5030
Defaults to @code{1}.
5031
 
5032
@end ftable
5033
 
5034
@node Adding a New Target
5035
@section Adding a New Target
5036
 
5037
@cindex adding a target
5038
The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
5039
 
5040
@table @file
5041 131 jeremybenn
@cindex target dependent files
5042 24 jeremybenn
 
5043
@item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
5044
Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine.  On
5045 131 jeremybenn
some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5046 24 jeremybenn
 
5047
@item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
5048
@itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
5049 131 jeremybenn
This is required to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
5050
processor chip (registers, stack, etc.).  It can be shared among many
5051
targets that use the same processor architecture.
5052 24 jeremybenn
 
5053 131 jeremybenn
@end table
5054 24 jeremybenn
 
5055 131 jeremybenn
(Target header files such as
5056
@file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h},
5057
@file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h}, and
5058
@file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} are no longer used.)
5059 24 jeremybenn
 
5060 131 jeremybenn
@findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
5061
A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, arch is created by
5062
defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
5063
convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.  For
5064
example, in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
5065
@code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
5066
@file{or1k-tdep.c}.
5067 24 jeremybenn
 
5068 131 jeremybenn
The object file resulting from compiling this source file, which will
5069
contain the implementation of the
5070
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function is specified in the
5071
@value{GDBN} @file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case
5072
statement pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
5073
@kbd{configure} script.
5074 24 jeremybenn
 
5075 131 jeremybenn
@quotation
5076
@emph{Note:} If the architecture requires multiple source files, the
5077
corresponding binaries should be included in
5078
@file{configure.tgt}.  However if there are header files, the
5079
dependencies on these will not be picked up from the entries in
5080
@file{configure.tgt}.  The @file{Makefile.in} file will need extending to
5081
show these dependencies.
5082
@end quotation
5083 24 jeremybenn
 
5084 131 jeremybenn
@findex gdbarch_register
5085
A new struct gdbarch, defining the new architecture, is created within
5086
the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
5087
@code{gdbarch_register}:
5088 24 jeremybenn
 
5089 131 jeremybenn
@smallexample
5090
void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture    architecture,
5091
                       gdbarch_init_ftype      *init_func,
5092
                       gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *tdep_dump_func);
5093
@end smallexample
5094
 
5095
This function has been described fully in an earlier
5096
section.  @xref{How an Architecture is Represented, , How an
5097
Architecture is Represented}.
5098
 
5099
The new @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} should contain implementations of
5100
the necessary functions (described in the previous sections) to
5101
describe the basic layout of the target machine's processor chip
5102
(registers, stack, etc.).  It can be shared among many targets that use
5103
the same processor architecture.
5104
 
5105 24 jeremybenn
@node Target Descriptions
5106
@chapter Target Descriptions
5107
@cindex target descriptions
5108
 
5109
The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
5110
contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture.  For
5111
some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
5112
instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
5113
@dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
5114
more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
5115
directly.
5116
 
5117
For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
5118
target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
5119
Debugging with @value{GDBN}}.  This section will cover some related
5120
topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
5121
 
5122
@menu
5123
* Target Descriptions Implementation::
5124
* Adding Target Described Register Support::
5125
@end menu
5126
 
5127
@node Target Descriptions Implementation
5128
@section Target Descriptions Implementation
5129
@cindex target descriptions, implementation
5130
 
5131
Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
5132
an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
5133
reverts to a default gdbarch.  Then, after connecting, it looks for a
5134
new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
5135
 
5136
A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
5137
@samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
5138
@code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector.  For instance,
5139
the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
5140
64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
5141
 
5142
If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
5143
incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}.  Any
5144
@samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
5145
architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
5146
new architecture.  Then the initialization routine is called, and has
5147
a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
5148
of the target description.  For instance, it can recognize any
5149
properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine.  Also
5150
see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
5151
 
5152
@node Adding Target Described Register Support
5153
@section Adding Target Described Register Support
5154
@cindex target descriptions, adding register support
5155
 
5156
Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
5157
instance of the target.  But it takes a little work in the architecture
5158
specific routines to support this.
5159
 
5160
A target description must either have no registers or a complete
5161
set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
5162
with the target defined registers.  It is the architecture's
5163
responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
5164
everything it needs.  To keep architecture code simple, the same
5165
mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
5166
standard registers.
5167
 
5168
If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
5169
registers.  The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
5170
 
5171
@itemize @bullet
5172
 
5173
@item
5174
Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
5175
searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
5176
 
5177
@item
5178
Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
5179
 
5180
@item
5181
Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
5182
to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
5183
 
5184
@item
5185
Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
5186
feature is missing expected registers.  This will produce a warning that
5187
the description was incomplete.
5188
 
5189
@item
5190
Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
5191
is called.
5192
 
5193
@item
5194
Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
5195
fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
5196
 
5197
@item
5198
Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
5199
returning it.
5200
 
5201
@end itemize
5202
 
5203
After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
5204
@code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
5205
routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
5206
the target description.  @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
5207
for any additional registers in the description.
5208
 
5209
Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
5210
 
5211
@itemize @bullet
5212
 
5213
@item
5214
Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
5215
constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
5216
as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}.  But because
5217
pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
5218
which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
5219
can not be used for pseudos.  They must be numbered relative to
5220
@code{num_regs} instead.
5221
 
5222
@item
5223
The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
5224
architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
5225
@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
5226
@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
5227
describing pseudo registers.  These routines will be passed
5228
internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
5229
gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
5230
 
5231
@end itemize
5232
 
5233
 
5234
@node Target Vector Definition
5235
 
5236
@chapter Target Vector Definition
5237
@cindex target vector
5238
 
5239
The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
5240
abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
5241
actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
5242
@value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
5243
each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
5244
 
5245
@menu
5246
* Managing Execution State::
5247
* Existing Targets::
5248
@end menu
5249
 
5250
@node Managing Execution State
5251
@section Managing Execution State
5252
@cindex execution state
5253
 
5254
A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
5255
stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
5256
manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
5257
inferior).  Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
5258
active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
5259
when the target has exited or not yet started.
5260
 
5261
For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
5262
not create a running program.  Neither registers nor memory are
5263
accessible until @code{run}.  Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
5264
program can not continue executing.  But in both cases @value{GDBN}
5265
remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
5266
are directed to the simulator.
5267
 
5268
A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
5269
onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
5270
@code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
5271
@code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
5272
 
5273
A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
5274
still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
5275
@code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}.  Instead, it should
5276
call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
5277
in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
5278
after connection.  It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
5279
time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
5280
@code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
5281
@code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
5282
@code{to_mourn_inferior}).  The target should also make sure to call
5283
@code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
5284
target to inactive state.
5285
 
5286
@node Existing Targets
5287
@section Existing Targets
5288
@cindex targets
5289
 
5290
@subsection File Targets
5291
 
5292
Both executables and core files have target vectors.
5293
 
5294
@subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
5295
 
5296 131 jeremybenn
@value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code that
5297
runs in the target system.  @value{GDBN} provides several sample
5298 24 jeremybenn
@dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
5299 131 jeremybenn
systems for this purpose; they are named @file{@var{cpu}-stub.c}.  Many
5300
operating systems, embedded targets, emulators, and simulators already
5301
have a @value{GDBN} stub built into them, and maintenance of the remote
5302
protocol must be careful to preserve compatibility.
5303 24 jeremybenn
 
5304
The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
5305
your target code.  What follows is a discussion of integrating the
5306
SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
5307
program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
5308
 
5309
The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
5310
@code{trap_low}:
5311
 
5312
@enumerate
5313
@item
5314
%l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
5315
 
5316
@item
5317
traps are disabled;
5318
 
5319
@item
5320
you are in the correct trap window.
5321
@end enumerate
5322
 
5323
As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
5324
is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
5325
The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
5326
hardware trap vector.  That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
5327
which is provided by the external environment.  For instance, this could
5328
set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
5329
first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
5330
 
5331
For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
5332
``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
5333
and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions.  Anyway, this is all
5334
controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify.  The most important
5335
trap for us is for @code{ta 1}.  Without that, we can't single step or
5336
do breakpoints.  Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
5337
of the debugger/stub.
5338
 
5339
From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
5340
They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
5341
 
5342
@subsection ROM Monitor Interface
5343
 
5344
@subsection Custom Protocols
5345
 
5346
@subsection Transport Layer
5347
 
5348
@subsection Builtin Simulator
5349
 
5350
 
5351
@node Native Debugging
5352
 
5353
@chapter Native Debugging
5354
@cindex native debugging
5355
 
5356
Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
5357
 
5358
@table @file
5359
@vindex NATDEPFILES
5360
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
5361
Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
5362
machine @var{xyz}.  In particular, this lists the required
5363
native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
5364
Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
5365
@var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}.  You can also
5366
define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
5367 131 jeremybenn
@samp{NAT_CDEPS}, @samp{NAT_GENERATED_FILES}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
5368 24 jeremybenn
 
5369
@emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
5370
originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
5371
on machine @var{xyz}.  While the file is no longer used for this
5372
purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains.  Perhaps someone will
5373
eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
5374
suffix.}
5375
 
5376
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
5377
(@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}).  Contains C
5378
macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
5379
child process control and core file support.
5380
 
5381
@item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
5382
Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
5383
this machine.  On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5384
@end table
5385
 
5386
There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
5387
various systems.  These can be customized in various ways by macros
5388
defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file.  If these routines work for
5389
the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
5390
@samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5391
 
5392
Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
5393
to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
5394
Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
5395
into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5396
 
5397
@table @file
5398
@item inftarg.c
5399
This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5400
processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
5401
 
5402
@item procfs.c
5403
This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5404
processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
5405
 
5406
@item fork-child.c
5407
This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
5408
and exec'' to start up a child process.
5409
 
5410
@item infptrace.c
5411
This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
5412
the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
5413
@end table
5414
 
5415
@section Native core file Support
5416
@cindex native core files
5417
 
5418
@table @file
5419
@findex fetch_core_registers
5420
@item core-aout.c::fetch_core_registers()
5421
Support for reading registers out of a core file.  This routine calls
5422
@code{register_addr()}, see below.  Now that BFD is used to read core
5423
files, virtually all machines should use @code{core-aout.c}, and should
5424
just provide @code{fetch_core_registers} in @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} (or
5425
@code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} in @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h}).
5426
 
5427
@item core-aout.c::register_addr()
5428
If your @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file defines the macro
5429
@code{REGISTER_U_ADDR(addr, blockend, regno)}, it should be defined to
5430
set @code{addr} to the offset within the @samp{user} struct of @value{GDBN}
5431
register number @code{regno}.  @code{blockend} is the offset within the
5432
``upage'' of @code{u.u_ar0}.  If @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} is defined,
5433
@file{core-aout.c} will define the @code{register_addr()} function and
5434
use the macro in it.  If you do not define @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR}, but
5435
you are using the standard @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you will need
5436
to define your own version of @code{register_addr()}, put it into your
5437
@code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file, and be sure @code{@var{xyz}-nat.o} is in
5438
the @code{NATDEPFILES} list.  If you have your own
5439
@code{fetch_core_registers()}, you may not need a separate
5440
@code{register_addr()}.  Many custom @code{fetch_core_registers()}
5441
implementations simply locate the registers themselves.@refill
5442
@end table
5443
 
5444
When making @value{GDBN} run native on a new operating system, to make it
5445
possible to debug core files, you will need to either write specific
5446
code for parsing your OS's core files, or customize
5447
@file{bfd/trad-core.c}.  First, use whatever @code{#include} files your
5448
machine uses to define the struct of registers that is accessible
5449
(possibly in the u-area) in a core file (rather than
5450
@file{machine/reg.h}), and an include file that defines whatever header
5451
exists on a core file (e.g., the u-area or a @code{struct core}).  Then
5452
modify @code{trad_unix_core_file_p} to use these values to set up the
5453
section information for the data segment, stack segment, any other
5454
segments in the core file (perhaps shared library contents or control
5455
information), ``registers'' segment, and if there are two discontiguous
5456
sets of registers (e.g., integer and float), the ``reg2'' segment.  This
5457
section information basically delimits areas in the core file in a
5458
standard way, which the section-reading routines in BFD know how to seek
5459
around in.
5460
 
5461
Then back in @value{GDBN}, you need a matching routine called
5462
@code{fetch_core_registers}.  If you can use the generic one, it's in
5463
@file{core-aout.c}; if not, it's in your @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file.
5464
It will be passed a char pointer to the entire ``registers'' segment,
5465
its length, and a zero; or a char pointer to the entire ``regs2''
5466
segment, its length, and a 2.  The routine should suck out the supplied
5467
register values and install them into @value{GDBN}'s ``registers'' array.
5468
 
5469
If your system uses @file{/proc} to control processes, and uses ELF
5470
format core files, then you may be able to use the same routines for
5471
reading the registers out of processes and out of core files.
5472
 
5473
@section ptrace
5474
 
5475
@section /proc
5476
 
5477
@section win32
5478
 
5479
@section shared libraries
5480
 
5481
@section Native Conditionals
5482
@cindex native conditionals
5483
 
5484
When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
5485
defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
5486
target systems are the same.  These macros should be defined (or left
5487
undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
5488
 
5489
@table @code
5490
 
5491
@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
5492
An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
5493
support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
5494
 
5495
@item PROC_NAME_FMT
5496
@findex PROC_NAME_FMT
5497
Defines the format for the name of a @file{/proc} device.  Should be
5498
defined in @file{nm.h} @emph{only} in order to override the default
5499
definition in @file{procfs.c}.
5500
 
5501
@item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
5502
@findex SOLIB_ADD
5503
Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
5504 131 jeremybenn
@var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table.  If
5505 24 jeremybenn
@var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
5506
processing for @var{filename} is still done.
5507
 
5508
@item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5509
@findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5510
Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
5511
want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
5512
 
5513
@item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5514
@findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5515
When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
5516
twice; once when
5517
the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs.  If the actual
5518
number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
5519
expand into the number expected.
5520
 
5521
@end table
5522
 
5523
@node Support Libraries
5524
 
5525
@chapter Support Libraries
5526
 
5527
@section BFD
5528
@cindex BFD library
5529
 
5530
BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
5531
 
5532
@table @emph
5533
@item identifying executable and core files
5534
BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
5535
several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
5536
 
5537
@item access to sections of files
5538
BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
5539
sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
5540
(such as the text section or the data section).  @value{GDBN} simply
5541
calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
5542
length @var{z}.
5543
 
5544
@item specialized core file support
5545
BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
5546
core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
5547
file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
5548
file.
5549
 
5550
@item locating the symbol information
5551
@value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
5552
symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file.  @value{GDBN} itself
5553
handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
5554
symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
5555
string table, etc.
5556
@end table
5557
 
5558
@section opcodes
5559
@cindex opcodes library
5560
 
5561
The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler.  (It's a separate
5562
library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
5563
 
5564
@section readline
5565
@cindex readline library
5566
The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
5567
that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
5568
 
5569
@section libiberty
5570
@cindex @code{libiberty} library
5571
 
5572
The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
5573
that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
5574
systems.  Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
5575
groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
5576
environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
5577
a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
5578
functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
5579
beyond standard functions).
5580
 
5581
@value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
5582
library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
5583
floating format support functions, the input options parser
5584
@samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
5585
 
5586
@subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
5587
@cindex @code{obstacks}
5588
 
5589
The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
5590
chunks of memory.  Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
5591
like a stack.  Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
5592
allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
5593
@code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
5594
@code{obstacks}).
5595
 
5596
The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
5597
object files.  There is an obstack associated with each internal
5598
representation of an object file.  Lots of things get allocated on
5599
these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
5600
symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
5601
fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
5602
offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
5603
string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
5604
information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
5605
unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data.  Plus
5606
various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
5607
names of types.
5608
 
5609
An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
5610
that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
5611
various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
5612
once using the @code{obstack_free} function.  The @code{obstack_free}
5613
function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
5614
deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
5615
start the cleanups).  Because of the stack like structure of the
5616
@code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
5617
obstack.  There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
5618
happens.  Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
5619
is allocated to the obstack.  Only the local data is deleted from the
5620
obstack.  Of course this assumes that nothing between the
5621
@code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
5622
else on the same obstack.  For this reason it is best and safest to
5623
use temporary @code{obstacks}.
5624
 
5625
Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se.  It is safe only
5626
under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
5627
longer needed.  In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
5628
when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
5629
new symbol file.
5630
 
5631
@section gnu-regex
5632
@cindex regular expressions library
5633
 
5634
Regex conditionals.
5635
 
5636
@table @code
5637
@item C_ALLOCA
5638
 
5639
@item NFAILURES
5640
 
5641
@item RE_NREGS
5642
 
5643
@item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
5644
 
5645
@item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
5646
 
5647
@item SYNTAX_TABLE
5648
 
5649
@item Sword
5650
 
5651
@item sparc
5652
@end table
5653
 
5654
@section Array Containers
5655
@cindex Array Containers
5656
@cindex VEC
5657
 
5658
Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
5659
objects.  C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
5660
and repetitive.  The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
5661
and using a typesafe vector type.  The functions defined will be
5662
inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
5663
Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
5664
 
5665
An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
5666
The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
5667
the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
5668
bookkeeping.  Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
5669
accidentally mixing up the contents.  Think of these as C++ templates,
5670
but implemented in C.
5671
 
5672
Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
5673
and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
5674
these variants.  Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
5675
pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
5676
stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
5677
dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector.  The scalar
5678
object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
5679
elements are returned by value.
5680
 
5681
There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors.  The iterator
5682
returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
5683
variable passed by reference.  Because the iterator will be inlined,
5684
the address-of can be optimized away.
5685
 
5686
The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
5687
are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
5688
itself.  This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
5689
--- always use a pointer to a vector.  The one exception is the final
5690
field of a structure, which could be a vector type.  You will have to
5691
use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
5692
such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
5693
the @dfn{safe} allocation variants).  The trailing array idiom is used
5694
(rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
5695
@code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
5696
minimal space in the structure containing them.
5697
 
5698
Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
5699
available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants.  The former presumes
5700
that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
5701
(it dies if there is not).  The latter will reallocate the vector, if
5702
needed.  Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
5703
If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
5704
to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
5705
@dfn{quick} operation.  This will ensure there are at least as many
5706
elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
5707
too few spare slots.  If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
5708
but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
5709
is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation.  You
5710
can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
5711
 
5712
You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
5713 131 jeremybenn
remove from the end of the vector.  If you need to remove several items
5714 24 jeremybenn
in one go, use the truncate operation.  The insert and remove
5715
operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
5716
There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
5717
ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
5718
@code{unordered_remove}.  The latter function copies the end element
5719
into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation.  The
5720
@code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
5721
the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
5722
 
5723
If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
5724
accessor will return the address of the start of the vector.  Also the
5725
@code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
5726
vector.  You will not normally need to use these two functions.
5727
 
5728
Vector types are defined using a
5729
@code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro.  Variables of vector
5730
type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro.  The
5731
characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
5732
@var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
5733
(@code{I}) type.  Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
5734
awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one.  There is a
5735
check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
5736
@code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
5737
that is not possible in plain C.
5738
 
5739
An example of their use would be,
5740
 
5741
@smallexample
5742
DEF_VEC_P(tree);   // non-managed tree vector.
5743
 
5744
struct my_struct @{
5745
  VEC(tree) *v;      // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
5746
@};
5747
 
5748
struct my_struct *s;
5749
 
5750
if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
5751
VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
5752
for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
5753
  @{ do something with elt @}
5754
 
5755
@end smallexample
5756
 
5757
The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
5758
accessors provided.  They are enumerated here:
5759
 
5760
@table @code
5761
@item VEC_length
5762
Return the number of items in the array,
5763
 
5764
@item VEC_empty
5765
Return true if the array has no elements.
5766
 
5767
@item VEC_last
5768
@itemx VEC_index
5769
Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
5770
 
5771
@item VEC_iterate
5772
Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
5773
traversed.
5774
 
5775
@item VEC_alloc
5776
@itemx VEC_free
5777
Create and destroy an array.
5778
 
5779
@item VEC_embedded_size
5780
@itemx VEC_embedded_init
5781
Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
5782
 
5783
@item VEC_copy
5784
Duplicate an array.
5785
 
5786
@item VEC_space
5787
Return the amount of free space in an array.
5788
 
5789
@item VEC_reserve
5790
Ensure a certain amount of free space.
5791
 
5792
@item VEC_quick_push
5793
@itemx VEC_safe_push
5794
Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
5795
sure that it is.
5796
 
5797
@item VEC_pop
5798
Remove the last item from an array.
5799
 
5800
@item VEC_truncate
5801
Remove several items from the end of an array.
5802
 
5803
@item VEC_safe_grow
5804
Add several items to the end of an array.
5805
 
5806
@item VEC_replace
5807
Overwrite an item in the array.
5808
 
5809
@item VEC_quick_insert
5810
@itemx VEC_safe_insert
5811
Insert an item into the middle of the array.  Either the space must
5812
already exist, or the space is created.
5813
 
5814
@item VEC_ordered_remove
5815
@itemx VEC_unordered_remove
5816
Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
5817
 
5818
@item VEC_block_remove
5819
Remove a set of items from the array.
5820
 
5821
@item VEC_address
5822
Provide the address of the first element.
5823
 
5824
@item VEC_lower_bound
5825
Binary search the array.
5826
 
5827
@end table
5828
 
5829
@section include
5830
 
5831
@node Coding
5832
 
5833
@chapter Coding
5834
 
5835
This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
5836
algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
5837
 
5838
@section Cleanups
5839
@cindex cleanups
5840
 
5841
Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
5842
later.
5843
 
5844
When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
5845
@code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
5846
the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup.  The
5847
cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
5848
and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
5849
is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
5850
cleanups.  Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
5851
created.
5852
 
5853
Syntax:
5854
 
5855
@table @code
5856
@item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5857
Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5858
 
5859
@findex make_cleanup
5860
@item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5861
Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5862
@var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later.  The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5863
handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5864
@code{discard_cleanups}.  Unless you are going to call
5865
@code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5866
from @code{make_cleanup}.
5867
 
5868
@findex do_cleanups
5869
@item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5870
Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5871
@code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5872
 
5873
@findex discard_cleanups
5874
@item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5875
Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5876
the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5877
@end table
5878
 
5879
Cleanups are implemented as a chain.  The handle returned by
5880
@code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5881
later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5882
performed).  E.g.:
5883
 
5884
@smallexample
5885
make_cleanup (a, 0);
5886
@{
5887
  struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5888
  make_cleanup (c, 0)
5889
  ...
5890
  do_cleanups (old);
5891
@}
5892
@end smallexample
5893
 
5894
@noindent
5895
will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}.  The
5896
cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5897
be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5898
 
5899
Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5900
Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5901
will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups.  This need leads
5902
to two common cleanup styles.
5903
 
5904
The first style is try/finally.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
5905
@code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5906
code-block's cleanups are always performed.  For instance, the following
5907
code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5908
called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5909
@code{xfree} will always be called:
5910
 
5911
@smallexample
5912
struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5913
data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5914
make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5915
... blah blah ...
5916
do_cleanups (old);
5917
@end smallexample
5918
 
5919
The second style is try/except.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
5920
@code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5921
any created cleanups are not performed.  For instance, the following
5922
code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5923
an error:
5924
 
5925
@smallexample
5926
FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5927
struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5928
... blah blah ...
5929
discard_cleanups (old);
5930
return file;
5931
@end smallexample
5932
 
5933
Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5934
that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''.  This
5935
means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5936
interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5937
functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5938
@samp{longjmp} instead).
5939
 
5940
@section Per-architecture module data
5941
@cindex per-architecture module data
5942
@cindex multi-arch data
5943
@cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5944
 
5945
The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5946
specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5947
architecture object.
5948
 
5949
A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5950
 
5951 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5952 24 jeremybenn
@var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5953
per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5954
in as a parameter).  Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5955
architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5956
and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5957 131 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
5958 24 jeremybenn
 
5959 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5960 24 jeremybenn
@var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5961
per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}.  Since @var{post_init} is
5962
always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5963
initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5964
per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5965
other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5966
create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5967 131 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
5968 24 jeremybenn
 
5969
These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5970
identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5971
 
5972
The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5973
 
5974 131 jeremybenn
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {void *} gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5975 24 jeremybenn
Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5976
@var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5977
or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5978
current value of the per-architecture data-pointer.  If the data
5979
pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5980
corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5981 131 jeremybenn
@end deftypefn
5982 24 jeremybenn
 
5983
The examples below assume the following definitions:
5984
 
5985
@smallexample
5986
struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5987
static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5988
@end smallexample
5989
 
5990
A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5991
per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method.  The module's
5992
per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5993
creation.
5994
 
5995
In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added.  An
5996
architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5997
from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5998
 
5999
@smallexample
6000
static void *
6001
nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
6002
@{
6003
  struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
6004
  return data;
6005
@}
6006
@end smallexample
6007
 
6008
@smallexample
6009
extern void
6010
set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
6011
@{
6012
  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
6013
  data->total = nozel;
6014
@}
6015
@end smallexample
6016
 
6017 131 jeremybenn
A module can on-demand create architecture dependent data structures
6018 24 jeremybenn
using @code{post_init}.
6019
 
6020
In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
6021
@code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
6022
architecture.
6023
 
6024
@smallexample
6025
static void *
6026
nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
6027
@{
6028
  struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
6029
  nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
6030
  return data;
6031
@}
6032
@end smallexample
6033
 
6034
@smallexample
6035
extern int
6036
nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
6037
@{
6038
  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
6039
  return data->total;
6040
@}
6041
@end smallexample
6042
 
6043
@section Wrapping Output Lines
6044
@cindex line wrap in output
6045
 
6046
@findex wrap_here
6047
Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
6048
or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
6049
added in places that would be good breaking points.  The utility
6050
routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
6051
exceeded.
6052
 
6053
The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
6054
printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there.  This argument is saved
6055
away and used later.  It must remain valid until the next call to
6056
@code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
6057
@code{*_filtered} functions.  Don't pass in a local variable and then
6058
return!
6059
 
6060
It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
6061
space.  If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
6062
indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
6063
the line wraps there.
6064
 
6065
Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
6066
finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
6067
to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output.  Symbol reading routines that
6068
print warnings are a good example.
6069
 
6070
@section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
6071
@cindex coding standards
6072
 
6073
@value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
6074
@file{etc/standards.texi}.  This file is also available for anonymous
6075
FTP from GNU archive sites.  @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
6076
of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
6077
but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
6078
 
6079
@value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
6080
@value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
6081
 
6082
 
6083
@subsection ISO C
6084
 
6085
@value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
6086
compiler.
6087
 
6088
@value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
6089
 
6090
 
6091
@subsection Memory Management
6092
 
6093
@value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
6094
@code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
6095
 
6096
@value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
6097
@code{xcalloc} when allocating memory.  Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
6098
these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty.  Instead,
6099
they unwind the stack using cleanups.  These functions return
6100
@code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
6101
 
6102
@emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
6103
memory allocation is removed.  These functions provide portable
6104
behavior.}
6105
 
6106
@value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
6107
 
6108
@value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
6109
memory pool.  Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
6110
free a @code{NULL} pointer.
6111
 
6112
@emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
6113
@code{NULL} pointer.}
6114
 
6115
@value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
6116
allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
6117
 
6118
@emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable.  Some systems
6119
restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
6120
 
6121
@value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
6122
function @code{xstrprintf}.
6123
 
6124
@emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail.  Print
6125
functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
6126
errors.}
6127
 
6128
 
6129
@subsection Compiler Warnings
6130
@cindex compiler warnings
6131
 
6132
With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
6133
@samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}.  The exceptions
6134
are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.  The default, when
6135
building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
6136
 
6137
This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
6138
with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags.  Any warnings
6139
from those flags are treated as errors.
6140
 
6141
The current list of warning flags includes:
6142
 
6143
@table @samp
6144
@item -Wall
6145
Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
6146
 
6147
@item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
6148
 
6149
@sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
6150
code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
6151
 
6152
@item -Wpointer-arith
6153
 
6154
@item -Wformat-nonliteral
6155
Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
6156
might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
6157
Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
6158
@code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
6159
but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
6160
 
6161
@item -Wno-pointer-sign
6162
In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
6163
assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
6164
signedness.  However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
6165
carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}.  In early 2006
6166
the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
6167
worth the time it would take.
6168
 
6169
@item -Wno-unused-parameter
6170
Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
6171
unused parameters.  Consequently this warning is avoided.  The macro
6172
@code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
6173
it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
6174
is being used.
6175
 
6176
@item -Wno-unused
6177
@itemx -Wno-switch
6178
@itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
6179
These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
6180
currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
6181
 
6182
@end table
6183
 
6184
@subsection Formatting
6185
 
6186
@cindex source code formatting
6187
The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
6188
strictly.
6189
 
6190
A function declaration should not have its name in column zero.  A
6191
function definition should have its name in column zero.
6192
 
6193
@smallexample
6194
/* Declaration */
6195
static void foo (void);
6196
/* Definition */
6197
void
6198
foo (void)
6199
@{
6200
@}
6201
@end smallexample
6202
 
6203
@emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting.  Function definitions can
6204
be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
6205
 
6206
There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
6207
parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
6208
required by C).  There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
6209
or before a close paren/bracket.
6210
 
6211
While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
6212
more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
6213
after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
6214
whitespace after the semicolon).  Excess whitespace causes difficulties
6215
for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
6216
 
6217
Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
6218
 
6219
@smallexample
6220
void *foo;
6221
@end smallexample
6222
 
6223
@noindent
6224
and not:
6225
 
6226
@smallexample
6227
void * foo;
6228
void* foo;
6229
@end smallexample
6230
 
6231
@subsection Comments
6232
 
6233
@cindex comment formatting
6234
The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
6235
 
6236
Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
6237
@code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
6238
 
6239
@smallexample
6240
/* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger.  If inferior
6241
   gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
6242
   returning.  That is why there is a loop in this function.  When
6243
   this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
6244
   stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands.  */
6245
@end smallexample
6246
 
6247
(Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
6248
comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
6249
 
6250
Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
6251
variable definitions, and the definition itself.
6252
 
6253
In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
6254
than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
6255
line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
6256
than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
6257
 
6258
@subsection C Usage
6259
 
6260
@cindex C data types
6261
Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
6262
host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
6263
of evaluation of expressions.
6264
 
6265
@cindex function usage
6266
Use functions freely.  There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
6267
in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
6268
call, mainly in symbol reading.  Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
6269
limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
6270
 
6271
However, use functions with moderation.  A thousand one-line functions
6272
are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
6273
 
6274
@emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
6275
(But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
6276
protected with parentheses.)
6277
 
6278
@cindex types
6279
 
6280
Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
6281
declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
6282
 
6283
 
6284
@subsection Function Prototypes
6285
@cindex function prototypes
6286
 
6287
Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
6288
a function.  Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
6289
argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
6290
function definition.
6291
 
6292
All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
6293
callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
6294
be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
6295
visible to random source files.
6296
 
6297
Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
6298
that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
6299
 
6300
 
6301
@subsection Internal Error Recovery
6302
 
6303
During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
6304
User errors and internal errors.  User errors include not only a user
6305
entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
6306
object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
6307
Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
6308
run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
6309
 
6310
When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
6311
@code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
6312
 
6313
@value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
6314
 
6315
@emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function.  Either
6316
the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
6317
@code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
6318
error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
6319
 
6320
@subsection File Names
6321
 
6322
Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
6323 131 jeremybenn
case.  Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
6324 24 jeremybenn
unique.  These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
6325
 
6326
@emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
6327
platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS.  Every time an unfriendly file
6328
is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
6329
@file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly.  Compare the
6330
convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
6331
@file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
6332
@file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
6333
 
6334
Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
6335
of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6336
 
6337
@emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
6338
 
6339
When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
6340
@file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
6341
@file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}).  These headers should be relatively
6342
independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
6343
the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
6344
should refer only to system types.  They may be shared between multiple
6345
programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
6346
 
6347
For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
6348
 
6349
 
6350
@subsection Include Files
6351
 
6352
A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
6353
 
6354
A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
6355
declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
6356
indirect inclusion.
6357
 
6358
A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
6359
declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
6360
indirect inclusion.  Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
6361
be directly included.
6362
 
6363
An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
6364
 
6365
An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
6366
Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
6367
pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
6368
 
6369
A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
6370
 
6371
An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
6372
files.  Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
6373
@code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
6374
 
6375
All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
6376
 
6377
@smallexample
6378
#ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
6379
#define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
6380
header body
6381
#endif
6382
@end smallexample
6383
 
6384
 
6385
@subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
6386
 
6387
@cindex design
6388
In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
6389
semantics.  Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
6390
experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
6391
trouble.
6392
 
6393
@cindex assumptions about targets
6394
You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
6395
(including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions).  Such things
6396
must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
6397
@value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
6398
such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
6399
 
6400
You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
6401
the target system.  All references to the target must go through the
6402
current @code{target_ops} vector.
6403
 
6404
You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
6405
(except in the ``native'' support modules).  In particular, you can't
6406
assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
6407
host machine.  Target code must bring along its own header files --
6408
written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
6409
copyright problems.
6410
 
6411
@cindex portability
6412
Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon.  It's much better
6413
to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
6414
systems.
6415
 
6416
@cindex system dependencies
6417
New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
6418
or operating systems are unacceptable.  All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
6419
for features.  The information about which configurations contain which
6420
features should be segregated into the configuration files.  Experience
6421
has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
6422
often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
6423
predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
6424
time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
6425
with regard to this feature.
6426
 
6427
Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
6428
target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
6429
 
6430
@cindex portable file name handling
6431
@cindex file names, portability
6432
One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
6433
creep in is handling of file names.  The mainline @value{GDBN} code
6434
assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
6435
a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
6436
directories, case-sensitive file names.  These assumptions are not
6437
necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows.  To avoid
6438
system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
6439
name, use the following portable macros:
6440
 
6441
@table @code
6442
@findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6443
@item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6444
This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
6445
whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family.  Use this
6446
symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
6447
such hosts.
6448
 
6449
@findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
6450
@item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
6451
Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
6452
character.  On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
6453
such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
6454
pass.
6455
 
6456
@findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
6457
@item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
6458
Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
6459
For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
6460
@file{/} is absolute.  On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
6461
@file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
6462
 
6463
@findex FILENAME_CMP
6464
@item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
6465
Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
6466
appropriate for the underlying host filesystem.  For Posix systems,
6467
this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
6468
will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
6469
 
6470
@findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6471
@item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6472
Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
6473
@code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
6474
This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
6475
 
6476
@findex SLASH_STRING
6477
@item SLASH_STRING
6478
This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
6479
absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
6480
@code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
6481
@code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
6482
@end table
6483
 
6484
In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
6485
functions whenever possible.  For example, to extract a directory or a
6486
basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
6487
@code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
6488
platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
6489
with @code{strrchr}.
6490
 
6491
Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
6492
attribute struct.  For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
6493
multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
6494
by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
6495
well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references).  Whenever
6496
something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
6497
using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
6498
@code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
6499
current target_ops structure.  In this way, when a new remote interface
6500
is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
6501
implements the new remote interface.  Other examples of
6502
attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
6503
formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
6504
 
6505
Please avoid duplicating code.  For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
6506
the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
6507
@value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
6508
something was very painful.  In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
6509
consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}.  @file{infptrace.c} can deal
6510
with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
6511
file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
6512
radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
6513
 
6514
All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
6515
@var{module}} command.  Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
6516
messages.  Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}.  Do not use
6517
@code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
6518
 
6519
 
6520
@node Porting GDB
6521
 
6522
@chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
6523
@cindex porting to new machines
6524
 
6525
Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
6526 131 jeremybenn
specifying the configuration of the machine.  Porting a new
6527
architecture to @value{GDBN} can be broken into a number of steps.
6528 24 jeremybenn
 
6529
@itemize @bullet
6530 131 jeremybenn
 
6531 24 jeremybenn
@item
6532 131 jeremybenn
Ensure a @sc{bfd} exists for executables of the target architecture in
6533
the @file{bfd} directory.  If one does not exist, create one by
6534
modifying an existing similar one.
6535 24 jeremybenn
 
6536 131 jeremybenn
@item
6537
Implement a disassembler for the target architecture in the @file{opcodes}
6538
directory.
6539 24 jeremybenn
 
6540 131 jeremybenn
@item
6541
Define the target architecture in the @file{gdb} directory
6542
(@pxref{Adding a New Target, , Adding a New Target}).  Add the pattern
6543
for the new target to @file{configure.tgt} with the names of the files
6544
that contain the code.  By convention the target architecture
6545
definition for an architecture @var{arch} is placed in
6546
@file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.
6547 24 jeremybenn
 
6548 131 jeremybenn
Within @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c} define the function
6549
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} which calls
6550
@code{gdbarch_register} to create the new @code{@w{struct
6551
gdbarch}} for the architecture.
6552 24 jeremybenn
 
6553 131 jeremybenn
@item
6554
If a new remote target is needed, consider adding a new remote target
6555
by defining a function
6556
@code{_initialize_remote_@var{arch}}.  However if at all possible
6557
use the @value{GDBN} @emph{Remote Serial Protocol} for this and implement
6558
the server side protocol independently with the target.
6559 24 jeremybenn
 
6560 131 jeremybenn
@item
6561
If desired implement a simulator in the @file{sim} directory.  This
6562
should create the library @file{libsim.a} implementing the interface
6563
in @file{remote-sim.h} (found in the @file{include} directory).
6564 24 jeremybenn
 
6565
@item
6566 131 jeremybenn
Build and test.  If desired, lobby the @sc{gdb} steering group to
6567
have the new port included in the main distribution!
6568 24 jeremybenn
 
6569 131 jeremybenn
@item
6570
Add a description of the new architecture to the main @value{GDBN} user
6571
guide (@pxref{Configuration Specific Information, , Configuration
6572
Specific Information, gdb, Debugging with @value{GDBN}}).
6573 24 jeremybenn
 
6574
@end itemize
6575
 
6576
@node Versions and Branches
6577
@chapter Versions and Branches
6578
 
6579
@section Versions
6580
 
6581
@value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
6582
@file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
6583
 
6584
@table @asis
6585
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}
6586
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
6587
an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
6588
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6589
a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
6590
6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
6591
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
6592
a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
6593
6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
6594
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
6595
a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
6596
@var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
6597
may include additional changes
6598
@end table
6599
 
6600
@value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
6601
numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
6602
of 50.  At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
6603
@var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
6604
 
6605
@value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar.  When the branch is cut, the
6606
@var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90.  As draft releases are
6607
drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented.  Once the
6608
first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
6609
@var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
6610
@var{patchlevel}.
6611
 
6612
For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
6613
identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
6614
 
6615
@table @asis
6616
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6617
drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
6618
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6619
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6620
drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
6621
6.1.90.20020304)
6622
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6623
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6624
drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
6625
@end table
6626
 
6627
If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
6628
6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
6629
here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
6630
 
6631
@smallexample
6632
     <HEAD>
6633
        |
6634
6.1.50.20020302-cvs
6635
        |
6636
        +--------------------------.
6637
        |                    <gdb_6_2-branch>
6638
        |                          |
6639
6.2.50.20020303-cvs        6.1.90 (draft #1)
6640
        |                          |
6641
6.2.50.20020304-cvs        6.1.90.20020304-cvs
6642
        |                          |
6643
6.2.50.20020305-cvs        6.1.91 (draft #2)
6644
        |                          |
6645
6.2.50.20020306-cvs        6.1.91.20020306-cvs
6646
        |                          |
6647
6.2.50.20020307-cvs        6.2 (release)
6648
        |                          |
6649
6.2.50.20020308-cvs        6.2.0.20020308-cvs
6650
        |                          |
6651
6.2.50.20020309-cvs        6.2.1 (update)
6652
        |                          |
6653
6.2.50.20020310-cvs         <branch closed>
6654
        |
6655
6.2.50.20020311-cvs
6656
        |
6657
        +--------------------------.
6658
        |                     <gdb_6_3-branch>
6659
        |                          |
6660
6.3.50.20020312-cvs        6.2.90 (draft #1)
6661
        |                          |
6662
@end smallexample
6663
 
6664
@section Release Branches
6665
@cindex Release Branches
6666
 
6667
@value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
6668
single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
6669
branch tags:
6670
 
6671
@smallexample
6672
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
6673
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
6674
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
6675
@end smallexample
6676
 
6677
@emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
6678
release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
6679
date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag.  The
6680
branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
6681
 
6682
@section Vendor Branches
6683
@cindex vendor branches
6684
 
6685
To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
6686
@file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
6687
(an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
6688
its version identifier).  E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
6689
Inc Patch 2)}.
6690
 
6691
@section Experimental Branches
6692
@cindex experimental branches
6693
 
6694
@subsection Guidelines
6695
 
6696
@value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
6697
repository, for experimental development.  Branches make it possible
6698
for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
6699
significant new developments.
6700
 
6701
The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
6702
 
6703
@table @emph
6704
 
6705
@item a branch has an owner
6706
The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
6707
ground rules.  In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
6708
adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
6709
 
6710
@item all commits are posted
6711
All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
6712
@email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} patches
6713
mailing list}.  While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
6714
should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
6715
 
6716
@item all commits are covered by an assignment
6717
This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
6718
and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
6719
 
6720
@item a branch is focused
6721
A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
6722
unnecessary or irrelevant changes.  Cleanups, where identified, being
6723
be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
6724
 
6725
@item a branch tracks mainline
6726
This keeps the level of divergence under control.  It also keeps the
6727
pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
6728
mainline.
6729
 
6730
@item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
6731
The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
6732
branch (branches of individual files should be avoided).  @xref{Tags}.
6733
 
6734
@item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
6735
The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
6736
the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
6737
@samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
6738
 
6739
@end table
6740
 
6741
@subsection Tags
6742
@anchor{Tags}
6743
 
6744
To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
6745
branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
6746
 
6747
@table @code
6748
 
6749
@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6750
@itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
6751
The branch point and corresponding branch tag.  @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
6752
date that the branch was created.  A branch is created using the
6753
sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
6754
@smallexample
6755
cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
6756
cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
6757
   @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
6758
@end smallexample
6759
 
6760
@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6761
The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
6762
on @var{yyyymmdd}.  To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
6763
use a command sequence like:
6764
@smallexample
6765
cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
6766
cvs update \
6767
   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6768
   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6769
@end smallexample
6770
@noindent
6771
Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
6772
merge.
6773
 
6774
@end table
6775
 
6776
@noindent
6777
For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
6778
@uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
6779
 
6780
@node Start of New Year Procedure
6781
@chapter Start of New Year Procedure
6782
@cindex new year procedure
6783
 
6784
At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
6785
 
6786
@itemize @bullet
6787
@item
6788
Rotate the ChangeLog file
6789
 
6790
The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
6791
@file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
6792
A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
6793
contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog.  The following should
6794
also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
6795
the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
6796
@smallexample
6797
Local Variables:
6798
mode: change-log
6799
left-margin: 8
6800
fill-column: 74
6801
version-control: never
6802 131 jeremybenn
coding: utf-8
6803 24 jeremybenn
End:
6804
@end smallexample
6805
 
6806
@item
6807
Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
6808
in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6809
 
6810
@item
6811
Update the copyright year in the startup message
6812
 
6813 131 jeremybenn
Update the copyright year in:
6814
@itemize @bullet
6815
@item file @file{top.c}, function @code{print_gdb_version}
6816
@item file @file{gdbserver/server.c}, function @code{gdbserver_version}
6817
@item file @file{gdbserver/gdbreplay.c}, function @code{gdbreplay_version}
6818
@end itemize
6819 24 jeremybenn
 
6820
@item
6821
Add the new year in the copyright notices of all source and documentation
6822
files.  This can be done semi-automatically by running the @code{copyright.sh}
6823
script.  This script requires Emacs 22 or later to be installed.
6824
 
6825
@end itemize
6826
 
6827
@node Releasing GDB
6828
 
6829
@chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
6830
@cindex making a new release of gdb
6831
 
6832
@section Branch Commit Policy
6833
 
6834
The branch commit policy is pretty slack.  @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
6835
5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
6836
 
6837
@itemize @bullet
6838
@item
6839
The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
6840
@item
6841
Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
6842
trunk.  If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
6843
file is better than committing a hack.
6844
@item
6845
When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6846
Does it fix a build?  Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6847
when debugging a static binary?
6848
@item
6849
The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6850
the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6851
@item
6852
Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6853
sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6854
@file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6855
@end itemize
6856
 
6857
@emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6858
functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6859
This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6860
reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6861
 
6862
 
6863
@section Obsoleting code
6864
 
6865
Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6866
code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6867
(an old target, an unused file).
6868
 
6869
Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6870
line.  Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6871
been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6872
 
6873
The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6874
wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6875
Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6876
 
6877
@enumerate
6878
@item
6879
Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB mailing
6880
list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6881
recommended.
6882
@item
6883
Wait a week or so.
6884
@item
6885
Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB
6886
Announcement mailing list}.
6887
@item
6888
Wait a week or so.
6889
@item
6890
Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6891
prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6892
@item
6893
Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6894
released.
6895
@item
6896
Remove the obsolete code.
6897
@end enumerate
6898
 
6899
@noindent
6900
@emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6901
hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development.  Firstly it
6902
helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6903
or simply wrong.  Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6904
the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6905
hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6906
 
6907
 
6908
 
6909
@section Before the Branch
6910
 
6911
The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6912
changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created.  For
6913
instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6914
building.  If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6915
@file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6916
 
6917
@subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6918
 
6919
People always forget.  Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6920
something interesting happened add it yourself.  The @code{schedule}
6921
script will mention this in its e-mail.
6922
 
6923
@subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6924
 
6925
Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6926
@file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved.  The
6927
@code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6928
 
6929
@subheading Refresh any imported files.
6930
 
6931
A number of files are taken from external repositories.  They include:
6932
 
6933
@itemize @bullet
6934
@item
6935
@file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6936
@item
6937
@file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6938
file)
6939
@item
6940
@file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6941
@end itemize
6942
 
6943
@subheading Check the ARI
6944
 
6945
@uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6946
(Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6947
conventions.  The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6948
of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems.  There shouldn't be any
6949
regressions.
6950
 
6951
@subsection Review the bug data base
6952
 
6953
Close anything obviously fixed.
6954
 
6955
@subsection Check all cross targets build
6956
 
6957
The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6958
 
6959
 
6960
@section Cut the Branch
6961
 
6962
@subheading Create the branch
6963
 
6964
@smallexample
6965
$  u=5.1
6966
$  v=5.2
6967
$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6968
$  D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6969
$  echo $u $V $D
6970
5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6971
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6972
-D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6973
cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag
6974
-D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6975
$  ^echo ^^
6976
...
6977
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6978
-b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6979
cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6980
-b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6981
$  ^echo ^^
6982
...
6983
$
6984
@end smallexample
6985
 
6986
@itemize @bullet
6987
@item
6988
By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6989
date/time.
6990
@item
6991
The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6992
@item
6993
Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6994
@item
6995
@file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6996
@item
6997
The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6998
@end itemize
6999
 
7000
@subheading Update @file{version.in}
7001
 
7002
@smallexample
7003
$  u=5.1
7004
$  v=5.2
7005
$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
7006
$  echo $u $v$V
7007
5.1 5_2
7008
$  cd /tmp
7009
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co \
7010
-r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
7011
cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co
7012
 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
7013
$  ^echo ^^
7014
U src/gdb/version.in
7015
$  cd src/gdb
7016
$  echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
7017
$  cat version.in
7018
5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
7019
$  cvs -f commit version.in
7020
@end smallexample
7021
 
7022
@itemize @bullet
7023
@item
7024
@file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
7025
mechanism.
7026
@item
7027
@file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
7028
initial branch version number.
7029
@end itemize
7030
 
7031
 
7032
@subheading Update the web and news pages
7033
 
7034
Something?
7035
 
7036
@subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
7037
 
7038
The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
7039
This file needs to be updated so that:
7040
 
7041
@itemize @bullet
7042
@item
7043
A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
7044
@item
7045
The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
7046
@end itemize
7047
 
7048
@noindent
7049
See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
7050
cron table.
7051
 
7052
The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
7053
any changes.  That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
7054
snapshot directories.
7055
 
7056
 
7057
@subheading Update the NEWS and README files
7058
 
7059
The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
7060
to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
7061
refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
7062
 
7063
The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
7064
current release.
7065
 
7066
@subheading Post the branch info
7067
 
7068
Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
7069
 
7070
@itemize @bullet
7071
@item
7072
@email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7073
@item
7074
@email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
7075
@email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Testers mailing list}
7076
@end itemize
7077
 
7078
@emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
7079
ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
7080
list are alerted.}
7081
 
7082
The announcement should include:
7083
 
7084
@itemize @bullet
7085
@item
7086
The branch tag.
7087
@item
7088
How to check out the branch using CVS.
7089
@item
7090
The date/number of weeks until the release.
7091
@item
7092
The branch commit policy still holds.
7093
@end itemize
7094
 
7095
@section Stabilize the branch
7096
 
7097
Something goes here.
7098
 
7099
@section Create a Release
7100
 
7101
The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
7102
down into a number of stages.  The first part addresses the technical
7103
process of creating a releasable tar ball.  The later stages address the
7104
process of releasing that tar ball.
7105
 
7106
When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
7107
 
7108
@subsection Create a release candidate
7109
 
7110
The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
7111
made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
7112
candidate).
7113
 
7114
@subsubheading Freeze the branch
7115
 
7116
Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
7117
@email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com}.
7118
 
7119
@subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
7120
 
7121
@smallexample
7122
$  b=gdb_5_2-branch
7123
$  v=5.2
7124
$  t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
7125
$  echo $t/$b/$v
7126
/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7127
$  mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
7128
$  cd $t/$b/$v
7129
$  pwd
7130
/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7131
$  which autoconf
7132
/home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
7133
$
7134
@end smallexample
7135
 
7136
@noindent
7137
Notes:
7138
 
7139
@itemize @bullet
7140
@item
7141
Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully.  You want to be using the
7142
version taken from the @file{binutils} snapshot directory, which can be
7143 131 jeremybenn
found at @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/binutils/}.  It is very
7144 24 jeremybenn
unlikely that a system installed version of @code{autoconf} (e.g.,
7145
@file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
7146
@end itemize
7147
 
7148
@subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
7149
 
7150
@smallexample
7151
$  for m in gdb insight
7152
do
7153
( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
7154
done
7155
$
7156
@end smallexample
7157
 
7158
@noindent
7159
Note:
7160
 
7161
@itemize @bullet
7162
@item
7163
The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
7164
any confusion between what is written here and what your local
7165
@code{cvs} really does.
7166
@end itemize
7167
 
7168
@subsubheading Update relevant files.
7169
 
7170
@table @file
7171
 
7172
@item gdb/NEWS
7173
 
7174
Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline.  Minor
7175
releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
7176
 
7177
Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
7178
 
7179
@smallexample
7180
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
7181
...
7182
c-x 4 a
7183
...
7184
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7185
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
7186
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7187
@end smallexample
7188
 
7189
@item gdb/README
7190
 
7191
You'll need to update:
7192
 
7193
@itemize @bullet
7194
@item
7195
The version.
7196
@item
7197
The update date.
7198
@item
7199
Who did it.
7200
@end itemize
7201
 
7202
@smallexample
7203
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
7204
...
7205
c-x 4 a
7206
...
7207
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7208
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
7209
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7210
@end smallexample
7211
 
7212
@emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
7213
before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
7214
to get it updated.}
7215
 
7216
@emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
7217
@file{INSTALL} from the core documentation.  This might be worth
7218
pursuing.}
7219
 
7220
@item gdb/version.in
7221
 
7222
@smallexample
7223
$  echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7224
$  cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7225
5.2
7226
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7227
...
7228
c-x 4 a
7229
... Bump to version ...
7230
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7231
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
7232
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7233
@end smallexample
7234
 
7235
@end table
7236
 
7237
@subsubheading Do the dirty work
7238
 
7239
This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
7240
 
7241
@smallexample
7242
$  for m in gdb insight
7243
do
7244
( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
7245
done
7246
@end smallexample
7247
 
7248
If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
7249
(@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
7250
 
7251
@smallexample
7252
$  for m in gdb insight
7253
do
7254
( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
7255
done
7256
@end smallexample
7257
 
7258
@subsubheading Check the source files
7259
 
7260
You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
7261
@kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't.  Watch out
7262
for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
7263
 
7264
@smallexample
7265
$  ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
7266
M djunpack.bat
7267
? gdb-5.1.91.tar
7268
? proto-toplev
7269
@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7270
M gdb/ChangeLog
7271
M gdb/NEWS
7272
M gdb/README
7273
M gdb/version.in
7274
@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7275
$
7276
@end smallexample
7277
 
7278
@noindent
7279
@emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
7280
@file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}.  They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
7281
was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
7282
didn't get suppressed).  Fixing it would be nice though.}
7283
 
7284
@subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
7285
 
7286
@smallexample
7287
$  cp */src/*.tar .
7288
$  cp */src/*.bz2 .
7289
$  ls -F
7290
gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
7291
$  for m in gdb insight
7292
do
7293
bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
7294
gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
7295
done
7296
$
7297
@end smallexample
7298
 
7299
@noindent
7300
Note:
7301
 
7302
@itemize @bullet
7303
@item
7304
A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
7305
in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
7306
can not include it in the compressed file.  This is also why the release
7307
process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
7308
@end itemize
7309
 
7310
@subsection Sanity check the tar ball
7311
 
7312
Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
7313
 
7314
@smallexample
7315
$  bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
7316
$  cd gdb-5.2
7317
$  ./configure
7318
$  make
7319
@dots{}
7320
$  ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
7321
GNU gdb 5.2
7322
@dots{}
7323
(gdb)  b main
7324
Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
7325
(gdb)  run
7326
Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
7327
 
7328
Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
7329
734       catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
7330
(gdb)  print args
7331
$1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
7332
(gdb)
7333
@end smallexample
7334
 
7335
@subsection Make a release candidate available
7336
 
7337
If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
7338
 
7339
@enumerate
7340
@item
7341
Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
7342
@item
7343
Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
7344
@var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
7345
process can restart.
7346
@item
7347
Make the release candidate available in
7348
@uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
7349
@item
7350
Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com} and
7351
@email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com} that the candidate is available.
7352
@end enumerate
7353
 
7354
@subsection Make a formal release available
7355
 
7356
(And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
7357
 
7358
@subsubheading Install on sware
7359
 
7360
Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
7361
 
7362
@smallexample
7363
$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
7364
$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7365
@end smallexample
7366
 
7367
@noindent
7368
Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
7369 131 jeremybenn
are available (e.g.@: keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
7370 24 jeremybenn
 
7371
@smallexample
7372
$  cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7373
$  rm @dots{}
7374
@end smallexample
7375
 
7376
@noindent
7377
Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
7378
directory:
7379
 
7380
@smallexample
7381
$  vi README
7382
@dots{}
7383
$  rm -f .message
7384
$  ln README .message
7385
@end smallexample
7386
 
7387
@subsubheading Update the web pages.
7388
 
7389
@table @file
7390
 
7391
@item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
7392
This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
7393
@itemize @bullet
7394
@item
7395
General announcement.
7396
@item
7397
News.  If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
7398
earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
7399
@item
7400
Errata.
7401
@end itemize
7402
 
7403
@item htdocs/index.html
7404
@itemx htdocs/news/index.html
7405
@itemx htdocs/download/index.html
7406
These files include:
7407
@itemize @bullet
7408
@item
7409
Announcement of the most recent release.
7410
@item
7411
News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
7412
@end itemize
7413
These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
7414
 
7415
@item download/onlinedocs/
7416
You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
7417
docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}.  The best way is to look in the output
7418
from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
7419
Something like:
7420
 
7421
@smallexample
7422
$  ~/ss/update-web-docs \
7423
 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7424
 $PWD/www \
7425
 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
7426
 gdb
7427
@end smallexample
7428
 
7429
@item download/ari/
7430
Just like the online documentation.  Something like:
7431
 
7432
@smallexample
7433
$  /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
7434
 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7435
 $PWD/www \
7436
 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
7437
 gdb
7438
@end smallexample
7439
 
7440
@end table
7441
 
7442
@subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
7443
 
7444
Something goes here.
7445
 
7446
 
7447
@subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
7448
 
7449
At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
7450
@file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
7451
 
7452
@subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
7453
 
7454
Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
7455
 
7456
@itemize @bullet
7457
@item
7458
@email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7459
@item
7460
@email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
7461
day or so to let things get out)
7462
@item
7463
@email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
7464
@end itemize
7465
 
7466
@subsection Cleanup
7467
 
7468
The release is out but you're still not finished.
7469
 
7470
@subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
7471
 
7472
In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
7473
 
7474
@itemize @bullet
7475
@item
7476
@file{gdb/ChangeLog}
7477
@item
7478
@file{gdb/version.in}
7479
@item
7480
@file{gdb/NEWS}
7481
@item
7482
@file{gdb/README}
7483
@end itemize
7484
 
7485
@subsubheading Tag the release
7486
 
7487
Something like:
7488
 
7489
@smallexample
7490
$  d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
7491
$  echo $d
7492
2002-01-24
7493
$  ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
7494
$  ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
7495
@end smallexample
7496
 
7497
Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
7498
@value{GDBN}.
7499
 
7500
@subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
7501
 
7502
Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
7503
indicates when the release was made.
7504
 
7505
@subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
7506
 
7507
If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
7508
@kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it.  Having
7509
committed all the release changes it can be set to
7510
@file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
7511
is important - it affects the snapshot process).
7512
 
7513
Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
7514
 
7515
@subsubheading Merge into trunk
7516
 
7517
The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
7518
trunk.
7519
 
7520
@subsubheading Revise the release schedule
7521
 
7522
Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB
7523
Discussion List} with an updated announcement.  The schedule can be
7524
generated by running:
7525
 
7526
@smallexample
7527
$  ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
7528
@end smallexample
7529
 
7530
@noindent
7531
The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
7532
of the most recent release.
7533
 
7534
Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
7535
 
7536
@section Post release
7537
 
7538
Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
7539
 
7540
@node Testsuite
7541
 
7542
@chapter Testsuite
7543
@cindex test suite
7544
 
7545
The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
7546
While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
7547
this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
7548
the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
7549
to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
7550
 
7551
The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework.  The
7552
tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
7553
runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
7554
 
7555
@section Using the Testsuite
7556
 
7557
@cindex running the test suite
7558
To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
7559
testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}.  This just sets up some
7560
environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script.  While
7561
the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
7562
and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails.  When the testsuite is
7563
finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
7564
 
7565
@smallexample
7566
                === gdb Summary ===
7567
 
7568
# of expected passes            6016
7569
# of unexpected failures        58
7570
# of unexpected successes       5
7571
# of expected failures          183
7572
# of unresolved testcases       3
7573
# of untested testcases         5
7574
@end smallexample
7575
 
7576
To run a specific test script, type:
7577
@example
7578
make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
7579
@end example
7580
where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
7581
spaces.
7582
 
7583
The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
7584
conspires to keep us from this ideal.  Unexpected failures indicate
7585
real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite.  Expected
7586
failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
7587
hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
7588
everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
7589
being fixed in the near future.  Expected failures should not be added
7590
lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
7591
Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
7592
reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
7593
catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
7594
program.
7595
 
7596
When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
7597
testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
7598
regressions.  Note that truly complete testing would require that you
7599
run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
7600
compilers; however this is more than really necessary.  In many cases
7601
testing with a single configuration is sufficient.  Other useful
7602
options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
7603
host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
7604
mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
7605
 
7606
If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
7607
tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
7608
and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
7609
Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
7610
failure, please add a test case for it.  Some cases are extremely
7611
difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
7612
in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
7613
tests for all of those.
7614
 
7615
DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines.  However,
7616
some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
7617
the host machine are not the same.  In such an environment, these scripts
7618
will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
7619
 
7620
@smallexample
7621
UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
7622
@end smallexample
7623
 
7624
@section Testsuite Organization
7625
 
7626
@cindex test suite organization
7627
The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}.  While the
7628
testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
7629
and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
7630
handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run.  The file
7631
@file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
7632
all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
7633
configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
7634
definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
7635
 
7636
The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
7637
subdirectories of those.  The names of the test files must always end
7638
with @file{.exp}.  DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
7639
in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
7640
get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
7641
 
7642
The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
7643
are for.  Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
7644
located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
7645
execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
7646
intelligibility.
7647
 
7648
@table @file
7649
@item gdb.base
7650
This is the base testsuite.  The tests in it should apply to all
7651
configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
7652
The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
7653
ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
7654
for prototypes).
7655
 
7656
@item gdb.@var{lang}
7657
Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C.  Examples are
7658
@file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
7659
 
7660
@item gdb.@var{platform}
7661
Non-portable tests.  The tests are specific to a specific configuration
7662
(host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos.  Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
7663
HP-UX.
7664
 
7665
@item gdb.@var{compiler}
7666
Tests specific to a particular compiler.  As of this writing (June
7667
1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
7668
couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
7669
imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
7670
extensions.
7671
 
7672
@item gdb.@var{subsystem}
7673
Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth.  For
7674
instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
7675
@file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
7676
@end table
7677
 
7678
@section Writing Tests
7679
@cindex writing tests
7680
 
7681
In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
7682
should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
7683
 
7684
You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
7685
includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
7686
However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
7687
instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
7688
calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
7689
 
7690
Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
7691
necessary.  Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
7692
a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}.  Like @code{gdb_test},
7693
@code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
7694
prompts.
7695
 
7696
Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
7697
On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
7698
spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
7699
 
7700
The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
7701
style.  Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
7702
styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
7703
instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
7704
never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
7705
uniformly.
7706
 
7707
@node Hints
7708
 
7709
@chapter Hints
7710
 
7711
Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
7712
appear anywhere else in the directory.
7713
 
7714
@menu
7715
* Getting Started::             Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
7716
* Debugging GDB::               Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7717
@end menu
7718
 
7719
@node Getting Started,,, Hints
7720
 
7721
@section Getting Started
7722
 
7723
@value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
7724
work on it, it can be hard to know where to start.  Fortunately, if you
7725
know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
7726
 
7727
This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
7728
generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
7729
 
7730
Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
7731
comments with those functions or data structures.  If you run across a
7732
function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
7733
explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
7734
free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
7735
out what the comment should say.  If you find a comment which is
7736
actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
7737
 
7738
Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
7739
native dependent files can be in several places.  Sometimes they are
7740
repeated every place the macro is defined.  Sometimes they are where the
7741
macro is used.  Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
7742
default definition of the macro, and the comment is there.  This manual
7743
also documents all the available macros.
7744
@c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
7745
@c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
7746
@c Conditionals})
7747
 
7748
Start with the header files.  Once you have some idea of how
7749
@value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
7750
@file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
7751
code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
7752
 
7753
You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
7754
enhance your understanding of it.  Summarize it, translate it to another
7755
language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
7756
the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
7757
and verify your prediction, etc.  If you are reading code and your eyes
7758
are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
7759
approach.
7760
 
7761
Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
7762
specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
7763
function with the @code{next} command.  Do not use @code{step} or you
7764
will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
7765
calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
7766
(perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
7767
called) of what it does.  This way you can identify which of the
7768
functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
7769
one which you are interested in.  You may need to examine the data
7770
structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
7771
the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
7772
look like.
7773
 
7774
Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
7775
code, rather than actually stepping through it.  The same general
7776
principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
7777
else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
7778
rather than worrying about all its details.
7779
 
7780
@cindex command implementation
7781
A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
7782
a command which invokes that feature.  Suppose you want to know how
7783
single-stepping works.  As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
7784
@code{step} command invokes single-stepping.  The command is invoked
7785
via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
7786
which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
7787
the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
7788
@code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}.  For example, the @code{step}
7789
command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
7790
display} command invokes @code{display_info}.  When this convention is
7791
not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
7792
tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
7793
breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
7794
 
7795
@cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
7796
If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
7797
on @code{bug-gdb}.  But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
7798
wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
7799
@value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
7800
Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
7801
 
7802
@node Debugging GDB,,,Hints
7803
 
7804
@section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7805
@cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
7806
 
7807
If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
7808
fully functional.  Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
7809
Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
7810
debugged in another.  Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
7811
./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
7812
@file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
7813
 
7814
When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
7815
@file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
7816
gdb easier.  The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
7817
in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
7818
gdb.  See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
7819
 
7820
If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
7821
you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
7822
routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
7823
@kbd{M-.}
7824
 
7825
Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
7826
have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
7827
 
7828
@section Submitting Patches
7829
 
7830
@cindex submitting patches
7831
Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
7832
@value{GDBN} users.  In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
7833
Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
7834
changes.
7835
 
7836
The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
7837
This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
7838
 
7839
If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
7840
or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
7841
with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
7842
 
7843
@cindex legal papers for code contributions
7844
The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
7845
copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
7846
of the changes to the Free Software Foundation.  You can get the
7847
standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7848
and asking for it.  We recommend that people write in "All programs
7849
owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7850
changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7851
etc) can be
7852
contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7853
bureaucracy and filed with the FSF.  We can't start merging changes until
7854
this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7855
since we maintain it for them).
7856
 
7857
Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7858
feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7859
Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7860
header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7861
each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7862
needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7863
@file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}).  If there are a lot of changes for a
7864
single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7865
 
7866
In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7867
sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7868
If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one.  If you leave
7869
out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting.  Etc., etc.
7870
 
7871
The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7872
install some of the changes.  They'll be returned to you with questions
7873
or comments.  If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7874
will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7875
The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7876
the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7877
being reworked.  If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7878
tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7879
the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7880
acceptable.
7881
 
7882
If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is.  But we get a lot
7883
of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7884
installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7885
reporter or the contributor could have done.  Patches that arrive
7886
complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7887
they arrive.  The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7888
permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7889
be for quite some time.
7890
 
7891
Please send patches directly to
7892
@email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7893
 
7894
@section Build Script
7895
 
7896
@cindex build script
7897
 
7898
The script @file{gdb_buildall.sh} builds @value{GDBN} with flag
7899
@option{--enable-targets=all} set.  This builds @value{GDBN} with all supported
7900
targets activated.  This helps testing @value{GDBN} when doing changes that
7901
affect more than one architecture and is much faster than using
7902
@file{gdb_mbuild.sh}.
7903
 
7904
After building @value{GDBN} the script checks which architectures are
7905
supported and then switches the current architecture to each of those to get
7906
information about the architecture.  The test results are stored in log files
7907
in the directory the script was called from.
7908
 
7909
@include observer.texi
7910
@raisesections
7911
@include fdl.texi
7912
@lowersections
7913
 
7914
@node Index
7915
@unnumbered Index
7916
 
7917
@printindex cp
7918
 
7919
@bye

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.